+ All Categories
Home > Documents > henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally...

henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally...

Date post: 14-Nov-2020
Category:
Upload: others
View: 0 times
Download: 0 times
Share this document with a friend
538
ALL IN ONE HENLE LATIN NOTEBOOK CHALLENGE B SEMESTER 2
Transcript
Page 1: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

ALL IN ONE HENLE LATIN NOTEBOOK

CHALLENGE BSEMESTER 2

Page 2: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B Latin Assignments  Semester 2 (Based on 2019-2020 guide)*Reading assignments should be translated

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

1 Lesson 16 pg 163- 169

41-43, 74-76 #186-189, 190, Read No. 4 163, 168

2 Lesson 16 - 17pg 169 - 181

41-43, 74-76 #191-192, #196-200, Read No 6 173

3 Lesson 17pg 181 - 188

243-245, 764 #202-212 182, 185, 186

4 Lesson 17 - 19pg 188- 199

246, 249, 252, 765, 247, 250, 253

#213, #216-219, #223-224, Reading No 8 192, 197

5 Lesson 19-21pg 199-210

248, 251, 254, 772, 255-266

#225-226, #228-229, , #231, #233-234, Read No. 10

202, 209

6 Lesson 21-22pg 211 - 231

186, 194-196, 352 #235 - 246, Read No. 11 227, 230

7 Lesson 22-23pg 231 - 240

187, 197-199 #247-258, Read No 13 235

8 Lesson 23 - 24pg 241 - 252

845-848, 353, 139, 479 #260-261, #263-265, Read No. 14

241, 248

9 Lesson 24pg 253 - 265

546 #267-270, #272-273, #275-276 Read No 16

254, 259, 263

10 Lesson 24 - 25pg 265 - 276

502-503, 140 #279-281, 283-284, #286-288, 290 Read  No. 17

267, 269, 272, 275

11 Lesson 25 - 26pg 276 - 290

200-207, 524-526 #291-292, #296-302Read No. 19,

280, 283

287

12 Lesson 26 - 27pg 290 - 300

28, 208, 216 - 218 #305-306, # 308-310 Read No. 20

293

296

13 Lesson 27 - 28pg 300 - 313

511, 518, 186, 194-196, 352, 127

#312-316, #318-319, #321-322, Reading No. 23

306

309

14 Lesson 29pp 314 - 322

267-274, 546-547, 275-282, 660-662, 781

#324-327, 329 - 331

#334

314

317

15 Lesson 29322 - 324

Review Reading No. 25 Review

Page 3: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 1

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

1 Lesson 16 pg 163- 169

41-43, 74-76 #186-189, 190, Read No. 4 163, 168

UNIT FOUR (pg 163 – 178)

LESSON 16: ADDITIONAL NOUNS AND ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS (pg 163 – 167)

1. DECLENSION OF PUER, AGER, AND VIR (pg 163 – 167)

There are, in the second declension, a few MASCULINE nouns that do not end in -us. These are:

PUER, PUERĪ, boy, and similar words;AGER, AGRĪ, field, and similar wordsVIR, VIRĪ, man.

How can you tell that these words belong to the second declension? Find the stems of puer, ager, and vir. NOTICE THE DIFFERENCE IN THEIR STEMS! Except in the nominative singular, all these words have the SAME ENDINGS AS SERVUS, Ī. Now complete these declensions without looking in the Grammar.

puer ager virpuer-ī agr-ī vir-īetc. etc. etc.

ASSIGNMENT: Study Grammar Nos. 41 – 43No 41 – 43

#41 #42 #43

Singular Nominative vir ager puer

Singular Genitive vir-ī agr-ī puer-ī

Singular Dative vir-ō agr-ō puer-ō

Singular Accusative vir-um agr-um puer-um

Singular Ablative vir-ō agr-ō puer-ō

Plural Nominative vir-ī agr-ī puer-ī

Plural Genitive vir-ōrum agr-ōrum puer-ōrum

Plural Dative vir-īs agr-īs puer-īs

Plural Accusative vir-ōs agr-ōs puer-ōs

Plural Ablative vir-īs agr-ī puer-īs

Page 4: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1

Vocabulary (pg 163)

puer, puerī - boy

ager, agrī - field

vir, virī - man

Italia, ae - Italy

fortūna, ae - fortune

ita, adv. - so, thus

trāns, prep. w. acc. - across

Note: Homō means a human being, a man as opposed to an animal; vir means a man as opposed to a woman or a child.

Chrīstus propter nōs hominēs in mundum vēnit.Christ came into the world on account of us men.

Men here means the human race; Christ came for both men and women, hence hominēs.

Caesar erat vir fortis.Christ was a brave man.

Vir is used because Caesar is not a woman and has manly, virile qualities.

Hereafter, use homō only when a human being or man in general is meant.

Related English Words:

A puerile remark. A virile character. The agrarian party. Lindbergh made the first solo transatlantic flight.

Page 5: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Exercises 186 – 188, Reading No. 4 (pg 164 – 167)

Exercise 186 (pg 164)

Translate:

1. With good boys. _________________________________________________________________

2. On behalf of noble men. ___________________________________________________________

3. Into good fields. ________________________________________________________________

4. A field full of boys. _______________________________________________________________

5. In the fields. ____________________________________________________________________

6. With a brave man. _______________________________________________________________

7. In a large field __________________________________________________________________

8. A boy similar to a brave man._______________________________________________________

9. On account of the glory of brave men. ________________________________________________

10. Through the fields of the Gauls. ____________________________________________________

11. The death of a brave man. ________________________________________________________

12. On account of the slaughter of mothers and boys. _____________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

13. The good fortune of a brave and noble man. __________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 6: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1

Exercise 187 (pg 164) [Essential]

Translate:

1. Virī Rōmānī fortēs erant et fortiter cum hostibus pugnāvērunt.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Ita Rōmam servāvērunt.

________________________________________________________________________________

Fortūna enim virōs fortēs adjuvat.

________________________________________________________________________________

2. Multī hostēs trāns montēs in Italiam vēnērunt. Eōs tamen Rōmānī vīcērunt.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

3. Puer bonus est glōria mātris. _______________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Omnēs enim patrēs et mātrēs puerōs bonōs semper laudant sed puerōs malōs nōn laudant.

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 7: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1

Exercise #187 contin...

4. Tum, post adventum exercitūs Rōmānī, erat magna frūmentī inopia in Galliā.

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Rōmānī enim frūmenta in agrīs incenderant. _____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

5. In Italiā erant agrī bonī, virī nōbilēs, puerī bonī. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

6. Imperātor Rōmānus cum omnibus cōpiīs in agrōs hostium vēnit. ___________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Frūmenta incendit; oppida et urbēs oppugnāvit; virōs et puerōs in castra dūxit. __________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 8: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1

Exercise 188 (pg 165)

This exercise reviews all the verbs of the first conjugation and drills on the present indicative.

Translate.

1. All men praise good fortune. ________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2.. Hannibal1, a brave and renowned man, has come across the mountains and is seizing a large part of Italy. __________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

3. Good boys often pray. ___________________________________________________________

4. The boys are preparing arms. _____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. They have come across the river into the fields and are burning the crops.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. He is placing troops in the fields of the enemy. __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

7. Brave men are fighting for us. ______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

8. He is stationing men in the fields of Italy. _____________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

1: Hannibal: Hannibal, Hannibali

Page 9: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1 Exercise #188 contin...

9. Thus do we brave soldiers keep the glory of the Roman name. ____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

10. The boys are helping the men in the fields. __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

11. Who is calling the boy? __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

12. Is the boy carrying a dispatch into Italy? _____________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

13. What are you giving the boy? ____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

14. Did they overcome the Gauls? ____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

15. What does the boy carry? ________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

16. Who is inciting the tribes of Gaul? _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

17. We do not help bad men. _________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________

18. He is stationing the soldiers before the gate of the camp. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

19. They are storming the cities of Italy. _______________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

Page 10: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1 Corresponds with Map on Page 166

Reading #4 (page 167) Translate:

Dē Italiā et dē Galliā

Italia est terra et magna et bona. Vidēsne Italiam in tabulā?1 Estne Italia magna? Estne longa?

_______________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________1 tabula, ae: map.

In Italiā erat Rōma, urbs et magna et nōbilis. Vidēsne Rōmam in tabulā? 1 Rōma in flūmine Tiberī est.

________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Vidēsne flūmen in tabulā? 1 In Italiā erant multae et magnae urbēs, flūmina longa, montēs altī. Erant etiam agrī frūmentōrum plēnī.

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

In agrīs Italiae Rōmānī multa bella cum fīnitimīs gentibus gesserant et tandem2 omnem Italiam vīcerant. Ita imperium Italiae Rōmānī tenuerunt.

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________2 tandem, adv.: finally.

Page 11: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1 Reading No. 4 contin.

In omnibus Italiae partibus omnēs virī et puerī nōmen Rōmānum et laudābant et dēfendēbant. Alpēs3 sunt montēs magnī et altī. Vidēsne montēs in tabulā? 1

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________3 Alpēs, Alpium: the Alps.

Trāns Alpēs tum erant et Prōvincia Rōmāna et Gallia. Multī imperatōrēs trāns montēs in Italiam vēnērunt. Hannibal,4 vir fortis et nōbilis, per montēs difficilēs cum omnibus cōpiīs in Italiam vēnit et ita in Italiae agrīs cum Rōmānīs bellum gessit.

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________4 Hannibal, Hannibalis: Hannibal (a great Carthaginian general)

Tum Caesar legiōnēs Rōmānās trāns montēs in agrōs Gallōrum dūxit. Napoleon etiam, imperātor fortis, cum magnīs cōpiīs trāns montēs in Italiam contendit et omnem Italiam occupāvit.

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Rōma, sīcut in tabulā1 vidēs, longē abest ā Galliā. In Galliā erant etiam urbēs et oppida et agrī bonī. Erant flūmina et montēs.

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 12: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1 Reading No. 4 contin.

Eōs in tabulā1 vidēs. Vidēs etiam fīnēs Prōvinciae Rōmānae. Ejus imperium Caesar tenuit et cum Gallīs bella gessit. Post victōriās Caesaris Rōmānī imperium omnis Galliae tenuērunt.

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Māter Italiae - Rōma ---Florus5

_________________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

5. L. Annaeus Florus, a Roman historian,

Page 13: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1

2. DECLENSION OF MISER AND INTEGER (pg 168 – 172)

There are, in the first and second declensions, a few adjectives whose masculine is like puer and ager.

LIKE PUER: miser, miser-a, miser-um, wretched STEM: miser-LIKE AGER: integer, integr-a, integr-um, fresh, uninjured STEM: integr-

ENDINGS: The endings for miser and integer are exactly like those of magnus except in the nominative masculine singular, miser, integer.

ASSIGNMENT: Decline miser and integer without looking in the grammar. Then study Grammar Nos. 74-76.

No. 74: Adjectives in -er of the First and Second Declensions.

There are two other kinds of adjectives in the first and second declensions:miser, miser-a, miser-um (stem, miser), wreteched.integer, integr-a, integr-um (stem, integr-), fresh.

These adjectives have the same endings as magnus except in the nominative singular masculine (miser, integer)

No. 75

Masculinelike puer

Femininelike porta

Neuterlike bellum

Singular Nominative MISER miser-a miser-um

Singular Genitive miser-ī miser-ae miser-ī

Singular Dative miser-ō miser-ae miser-ō

Singular Accusative miser-um miser-am miser-um

Singular Ablative miser-ō miser-ā miser-ō

Plural Nominative miser-ī miser-ae miser-a

Plural Genitive miser-ōrum miser-ārum miser-ōrum

Plural Dative miser-īs miser-īs miser-īs

Plural Accusative miser-ōs miser-ās miser-a

Plural Ablative miser-īs miser-īs miser-īs

Page 14: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1

No. 76:

Masculinelike ager

Femininelike porta

Neuterlike bellum

Singular Nominative INTEGER integr-a integr-um

Singular Genitive integr-ī integr-ae integr-ī

Singular Dative integr-ō integr-ae integr-ō

Singular Accusative integr-um integr-am integr-um

Singular Ablative integr-ō integr-ā integr-ō

Plural Nominative integr-ī integr-ae integr-a

Plural Genitive integr-ōrum integr-ārum integr-ōrum

Plural Dative integr-īs integr-īs integr-īs

Plural Accusative integr-ōs integr-ās integr-a

Plural Ablative integr-īs integr-īs integr-īs

Vocabulary (pg 168)

miser, misera, miserum - wretched

līber, lībera, līberum - free

integer, integra, integrum - fresh, uninjured, whole

proelium, ī - battle

cīvitās, cīvitātis - state

Note: The ablative of proelium is generally used without in in such expressions as: in many battles, multīs proeliīs.

Related English Words:

Lincoln liberated the slaves. A miserable fellow. The number one is an integer.

Page 15: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W1

Exercises 189 – 193, Reading No 5 (pg 168 – 172) – Assigned in Challenge B - #189, 190

Exercise 189 (pg 168)

Decline:

1. servus miser ___________________________________________________

2. legiō integra ___________________________________________________

3. rēs misera _____________________________________________________

4. oppidum līberum ________________________________________________

Exercise 190 (pg 169)

Translate:

1. With fresh forces. ____________________________________________________________________

2. For free men. __________________________________________________________________________

3. Against the wretched Gauls. _______________________________________________________________

4.With fresh legions. _______________________________________________________________________

5. In a free state. ___________________________________________________________________________

6. With the wretched slaves. _________________________________________________________________

7. After the victory of free men. _____________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

8. On account of a wretched fortune. __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

9. On account of the glory of a free state. _______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 1

Page 16: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 2

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

2 Lesson 16 - 17

pg 169 - 181

41-43, 74-76

(review week 1)

#191-192, #196-200, Read No 6 173

Exercises 189 – 193 – Assigned in Challenge B - #191 – 192

Exercise 191 (page 169)

Translate.

1. Virī nōbilēs et līberī cīvitātem Americānam1 servāvērunt._________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

2. Rōmānī, virī fortēs et līberī, Gallōs miserōs multīs proeliīs vīcērunt.________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Rōmānōs enim etiam fortūna adjūvit.___________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

3. Ducēs legiōnēs integrās in prímā aciē collocant. _______________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

4. Rōmānī oppida Gallōrum oppugnāvērunt; agrōs eōrum occupāvērunt; frūmenta incendērunt;

prīncipēs, ducēs, mātrēs, patrēs, virōs, puerōs, occīdērunt. Ita eōs vīcērunt.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

1 Americānam, a, um: American

Page 17: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Exercise #191 contin...

5. Hannibal2, vir fortis et nōbilis, cum omnibus cōpiīs trāns montēs in agrōs Italiae contendit. Cum eō

Rōmānī fortiter contendērunt.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Urbēs et oppida Italiae dēfendērunt. Post multa proelia et magnam caedem Rōmānī eum

superāvērunt. Ita glōriam nōminis Rōmānī servāvērunt.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Review Questions on Exercise 191

The words to which these questions refer are italicised in Exercise 191.

Sentence 2: Explain the use of virī. __________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

Sentence 4: Give the rule for the agreement of eōrum and eōs. Explain. _______________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

2 Hannibal, Hannibalis: Hannibal

Page 18: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Exercise 192 (pg 170)

This exercise reviews all third-conjugation verbs and drills on the imperfect.

Translate:

1. He was leading fresh troops into the battle. ____________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

2. The chief was defending the wretched Gauls. __________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

3. The Romans were conquering free states. ____________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

4. The Romans conquered the Gauls in many battles. _____________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

5. After the battle they were burning the crops and the towns. _______________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

6. The soldiers, brave and free men, were repulsing the enemy. _____________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

7. He was treating with the master concerning his wretched slave. ___________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 19: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Exercise #192 contin...

8. They were pitching camp after the battle. ____________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

9. The fresh legions were not yielding. ________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

10. He was hastening into Gaul with fresh forces. _________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

11. The slaves were not carrying arms. _________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

12. The wretched Gauls were seeking peace. ___________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

13. Was he sending a dispatch into Italy? _______________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

14. After the battle he was drawing up the injured troops. __________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

15. We Americans were defending a free state. __________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 20: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Exercise #192 contin...

16. They were sending boys and men into the fields. ______________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

17. We Americans shall always be free. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 21: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

3. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES OF THE FIRST AND SECOND PERSONS (pg 173 – 178)

The possessive adjectives of the FIRST PERSON are:

Vocabulary (pg 173)meus, a, um - my, minenoster, nostra, nostrum - our, ours

The possessive adjectives of the SECOND PERSON are:

tuus, a, um - you, yours (when referring to ONE person)vester, vestra, vestrum - your, yours (when referring to MORE THAN ONE person)

1. DECLENSIONMeus, a, um and tuus, a, um are declined like magnus, a, um.Noster, nostra, nostrum and vester, vestra, vestrum are declined like integer, integra, integrum

Exercise 194 (pg 173) – not assigned in Ch B

2. AGREEMENT

As adjectives the possessive adjectives AGREE WITH THE NOUN THEY MODIFY.

Vocabulary (pg 173)

Mīlitēs meī, my soldierspropter virtūtēs tuās, on account of your virtuesrēx noster, our kingin oppidō vestrō, in your town

Exercise 195, Moments at Mass No. 1 (pg 173 - 174) - Not assigned in Ch B

3. EXAMPLES OF USAGE

Vōs propter virtūtēs vestrās laudō. I praise you for your virtues.

(I am speaking to MORE THAN ONE person, hence vōs is used and so vestr- must also be used. Vestrās is feminine accusative plural because it AGREES with virtūtēs. )

Mātrem tuam laudō. I praise your mother.

(I am speaking to ONE person; hence tu- must be used. Tuam is feminine accusative singular because it AGREES WITH mātrem)

Page 22: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Mīlitēs meōs laudant. They praise my soldiers.

(ONE person is speaking; hence me- must be used. Meōs is masculine accusative plural because it AGREES WITH mīlitēs.)

Exercises 196 – 198, Reading No 6 (pg 175 – 178) – Assigned in Ch B - All

Exercise 196 (pg 175)

Translate.

1. On account of your fortune _________________________________________________

2. In our fields _____________________________________________________________

3. With our brave men _______________________________________________________

4. After my death ___________________________________________________________

5. In your state _____________________________________________________________

6. On account of the glory of our fathers _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 23: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2Exercise 197 (pg 175)

Translate.

1. Patrēs, nostrī, virī et līberī et fortēs, multīs proeliīs cum hostibus contendērunt.

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Ita cīvitātem nostram et dēfendērunt et servāvērunt. ______________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Itaque nunc cīvitātem et nōbilem et līberam habēmus. ____________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

2. Vōbīscum dē salūte mīlitum vestrōrum agēmus._______________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

3.Tē propter caedem servōrum miserōrum nōn laudō neque virtūtem tuam laudō .

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

4. In prīmam aciem legiōnēs meās integrās mittam _____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 24: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Exercise #197 contin...

5. Oppida vestra et urbēs vestrās oppugnābimus. ____________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Frūmenta incendēmus. ____________________________________________________________________

Puerōs vestrōs et mātrēs vestrās terrēbimus. Ita mīlitēs vestrōs vincēmus. ____________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

6. Bellum difficile et perīculōrum plēnum est. Hostēs tráns montēs veniunt.

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

In agrōs vestrōs veniunt. ____________________________________________________________________

Cum eīs fortiter pugnābitis neque dē pāce cum eīs agētis. ___________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

Fortūna etiam vōs adjuvābit. __________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 25: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S1W2

Exercise 198 (pg 176) [Essential]

Review all 2nd Conjugation Verbs.

Translate:

1. Our brave soldiers do not fear your attacks. _________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

2. I shall warn your commander in chief. ______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

3. Our state shall always be free. ______________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

4. Our cavalry will terrify your soldiers. _______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

5. We shall see your fields and your cities. _______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

6. Our soldiers, brave and free men, were holding the hill. __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

7. We shall move our camp at dawn. __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

8. They will not withstand our cavalry. _________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

9. I shall remain in my city. ________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

10. You were filling the wall with your men. __________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________

11. Your slave is warning me. ________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 26: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

Exercise #198 contin..

12. Do you hear our calvary? _______________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

13. Are you holding your camp? _____________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________________

14. Will our men withstand their attack? _______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

15. I do not fear your soldiers, for our brave men will withstand them. ________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________

Page 27: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

READING #6 (pg 176-178)

THE SECOND PUNIC WAR

In the third century before Christ, Carthage, a city on the northern coast of Africa, was the center of a powerful empire. It was the one rival of the growing power of Rome in the western Mediterranean, and it was therefore inevitable that these two nations should meet in a final struggle for power. This struggle came in the Second Punic War (218-202), a war in which Roman courage and Roman endurance were tested to the utmost. Later generations of Romans were to look back to the hard years of this war as Americans look back to Valley Forge or Englishmen to the German Blitz of World War II.

The war began when a Carthaginian army under Hannibal —one of the greatest generals of all history— attacked a Roman ally in Spain. At the very outset, Hannibal conceived the daring and unexpected plan of crossing the Pyrenees and the Alps and invading Italy from the north.

Translate:Hannibal, vir fortis et nōbilis, tum erat Carthāginiēnsium1 imperātor. Hostis populī Rōmānī semper

fuerat. Victōriae et imperiī cupidus fuit. Itaque cum Rōmānīs bellum fortiter gerēbat.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________1 Carthāginiēnses, Carthāginiēnsium: Carthaginians2 elephantus, i: elephant3 nondum: not yet

Page 28: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

READING #6 cont..

Is cum magnō exercitū in Hispāniā erat. Magnum numerum mīlitum et equitum et elephantōrum2

sēcum habēbat.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Cum omnibus cōpiīs per Galliam contendit (nōndum3 enim erat prōvincia Rōmāna in Galliā). Per silvās

magnās mīlitēs dūxit.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Trāns flūmina alta exercitum dūxit. Alpēs altī et magnī montēs erant. Via per eōs difficilis et angusta fuit.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Multae Gallōrum gentēs cum eō bellum gerēbant. Is tamen Gallōs multīs proeliīs pepulit et cum mīlitibus et

impedīmentis et elephantīs2 per montēs in Italiam vēnit.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

2 elephantus, i: elephant3 nondum: not yet

Page 29: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

READING #6 cont..

This was a terrible surprise to the Romans, who, meanwhile, had been planning an expedition to Africa. No one had expected Hannibal to transport such an army with its elephants and all its equipment across the mountain barrier that guarded the north.

As Hannibal stood on the southern slopes of the Alps and saw Italy before him at last, he spoke to his exhausted and discouraged men in some such fashion as this:

“Italia est! In Italiā sunt agrī bonī et cōpia omnium rērum. Sunt etiam oppida et multae et magnae urbēs. Eās Rōmānī nunc tenent, sed nōs Rōmānōs superābimus.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Urbēs et agrōs tenēbimus, etiam Rōmām occupābimus. Rōmānī fortēs sunt, sed nōs etiam sumus fortēs. Nōs nōn superābunt.

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Itaque omnem victōriae spem in virtūte pōnēmus! Fortūna etiam nōs adjuvabit; fortūna enim fortēs semper adjuvat. Post victōriam magna vōbīs praemia dabō et magnam habēbimus bellī glōriam!”

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________________

Page 30: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

READING #6 cont..

Questions on Reading No. 6:

Answer in Latin

1. Quis fuit Hannibal?

______________________________________________________________________________________

2. Eratne vir fortis?

____________________________________________________________________________________

3. Ubi fuit? __________________________________________________________________________

4. Quid sēcum habuit?

______________________________________________________________________________________

5. Vēnitne in Italiam?

_____________________________________________________________________________________

Page 31: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

UNIT FIVE (pg 179 - 224)

Lesson 17: Present System Passive of the First Conjugation; Agency (pg 179-191)

1. Active and Passive Voice (pg 179-180)

The boy throws the ball.The boy is throwing the ball.The boy does throw the ball.Is the boy throwing the ball?Does the boy throw the ball?

All these sentences say or ask WHO IS DOING THE ACTION, i.e. who is throwing. Hence, the verbs in all these sentences are in the ACTIVE VOICE because the SUBJECT- the boy- ACTS.

WHEN IS A VERB IN THE ACTIVE VOICE?WHEN THE SUBJECT IS THE PERSON OR THING THAT DOES THE ACTION.

All the verbs you have studied so far have been in the ACTIVE VOICE.

Is the ball being thrown?The ball is being thrown.

These sentences say or ask to what the action is being done. The verbs in these sentences are in the PASSIVE VOICE because the SUBJECT – the ball – RECEIVES THE ACTION.

WHEN IS A VERB IN THE PASSIVE VOICE?WHEN THE SUBJECT IS THE PERSON OR THING TO WHICH THE ACTION IS DONE.

Page 32: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2Exercise 199 (pg 180) – Assigned in Challenge B

Exercise 199 (pg 180)

Point out the voice of the verbs in these sentences:

1. America is being praised by many nations. _________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

2. Christ was crucified by many soldiers. _____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

3. The martyrs kept the faith. ______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. The faith was kept by the martyrs. ________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

5. I am praying. ________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

6. When St. Augustine was dying, his own city was being attacked by the Vandals.

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________.

7. Will America be kept free? ______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

8. Rome had been captured by the Gauls early in its history. _____________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

9. Is God being served by all men? _________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

10. We have often been told of the exploits of our heroic pilots. ___________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

11. We have often heard of the heroism of our soldiers. _________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 33: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W2

2. Final Personal Signs in the Passive (pg 180 – 181)

When we studied the present system ACTIVE we found the following personal signs:

1. I -ō , -m we -mus2. you -s you -tis3. he, she, it -t they -nt

Now, the present, imperfect, and future indicative active (of all conjugations) become PASSIVE by changing these final personal signs as follows

1. -ō to -or -mus to -mur -m to -r2. -s to -ris -tis to minī3. -t to -tur -nt to -ntur

Examples:laudō , I am praising becomes laudor, I am being praisedlaudābam, I was praising becomes laudābar, I was being praisedlaudās, you are praising becomes laudāris, you are being praisedlaudat, he is praising becomes laudātur, he is being praisedlaudāmus, we are praising becomes laudāmur, we are being praisedlaudātis, you are praising becomes laudāminī, you are being praisedlaudant, they are praising becomes laudantur, they are being praised.

S2W2

Page 34: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Exercise 200 (pg 181) – Assigned in Challenge BExercise 200 (pg 181)

1. Tranlate the active form here given;

2. Change the active form to the corresponding passive form:

Active Form Meaning Passive Formlaudō I am praising laudorvocōterreō

audiēbamterrēbamlaudābōmonēbō

dāsmonēs

agitsustinet

mittitvincit

laudābitlaudāmusvincēmus

audiēbāmusmonēmus

laudābimuslaudātispōnitis

perturbātisadjuvābātismonēbuntdūcēbant

collocābuntmūniuntlaudātisaudiuntmittimus

laudāmusaudītislaudantlaudāsmoneōmittō

END OF WEEK2

Page 35: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 3

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

3 Lesson 17

pg 181 - 188

243-245, 764 #202-212 182, 185, 186

3. Present System Passive of the First Conjugation (pg 181-184)

Assignment: Study the present, imperfect, and future indicative passive of the first conjugation, GRAMMAR, Nos, 243-245. Notice that one form does not follow the rules given for final personal sings in Section 2. The exception is future tense, second person singular: laudābis becomes laudāberis.

No. 243Present Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. laud-or - I am being praised ( I am praised) 2. laud-āris - you are being praised (You are praised) 3. laud-ātur - he, she, it are being praused (You are praised)

Plural - 1. laud-āmur - we are being praised (We are praised) 2. laud-āminī- you are being praised (You are praised) 3. laud-āntur– they are being praised (They are praised

No. 244

Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. laud-ābar - I was being praised 2. laud-ābāris - you were being praised 3. laud-ābātur - he, she, it are being praused

Plural - 1. laud-ābāmur - we were being praised 2. laud-ābāminī- you were being praised 3. laud-ābantur– they were being praised

No. 245

Future Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. laud-abor - I Shall be praised 2. laud-āberis - you will be praised 3. laud-ābitur - he, she, it will be praused

Plural - 1. laud-ābimur - we will be praised2. laud-ābiminī- you are being praised 3. laud-ābuntur– they are praised

Page 36: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Vocabulary (pg 182) administrō, 1. tr.- manage, attend to

appellō, 1. tr. - address, call (upon)

cōnfirmō, 1. tr. - encourage, strengthen

Related English words

The sacrament of confirmation. The president of the United States should be a good administrator.

Review Vocabulary

dō, dare, dedī, datus, 1. tr - give

adjuvō, adjuvāre, adjūvī, adjūtus, 1. tr. - help, aid

collocō, 1. tr. - place, station

oppugnō, 1. tr. - attack, assault, storm

Page 37: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 201 – 206 (pg 182 – 184)- Assigned in Challenge B - # 202 – 206

Exercise 202 (pg 182) Translate.

1. administrātur _______________________________________

2. appellātur _______________________________________

3. oppugnantur _______________________________________

4. cōnfirmātur _______________________________________

5. collocātur _______________________________________

6. laudāberis _______________________________________

7. cōnfirmābantur _______________________________________

8. administrābantur _______________________________________

9. adjuvantur _______________________________________

10. appellābāmur _______________________________________

11. laudāmur _______________________________________

12. datur _______________________________________

Page 38: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 203 (pg 183)

1. Change to the passive;

2. Tranlate both passive and active forms:

Active Form Translate: Passive form: Translate: 1 cōnfirmō2 appellābam3 cōnfirmābant4 dabat5 administrās6 cōnfirmat7 administrābat8 adjuvābit9 appellāmus10 adjuvātis11 cōnfirmābunt12 collocant13 cōnfirmant14 dat15 collocābās

Page 39: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 204 (pg 183)

Translate.

1. Marīa appellābātur.

______________________________________________________________________

2. Prōvincia administrābitur.

______________________________________________________________________

3. Amīcī cōnfirmantur.

_______________________________________________________________________

4. Gallia administrātur.

_______________________________________________________________________

5. Rōmānī cōnfirmābantur.

_______________________________________________________________________

6. Mundus administrātur.

______________________________________________________________________

7. Bella administrantur.

________________________________________________________________________

8. Deus Rēx hominum appellātur.

________________________________________________________________________

9. Imperātor appellābitur.

______________________________________________________________________

10. Pax cōnfirmābitur.

_______________________________________________________________________

Page 40: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #204 contin...

11. Prīncīpēs appellantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Virtūs legiōnum cōnfirmābatur.

_________________________________________________________________________

13.Spīritus Sānctus appellātur.

________________________________________________________________________

14. Rēs administrābātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

15. Spēs victōriae cōnfirmātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

16. Centuriōnēs appellābuntur.

__________________________________________________________________________

17. Virī fortēs cōnfirmābuntur.

__________________________________________________________________________

18. Rōma nōn oppugnābitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

19. Terra et caelum laudantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

20. Litterae ducis hostī dantur.

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 41: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #204 contin...

21. Nautae nōn adjuvābantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

22. Hīberna oppugnābantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

23. Signum legiōnibus datur.

__________________________________________________________________________

24. Glōria Deō dabitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

25. Magnus servōrum numerus eī dabātur.

________________________________________________________________________

26. Salūs et vēritās nōbīs per Chrīstum dantur.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

27. Praemia mīlitibus dabuntur.

__________________________________________________________________________

28. Victōria nautārum laudābitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

29. Multī hominēs in colle collocābuntur.

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 42: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #204 contin...

30. Gentēs fīnitimae adjuvantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

31. Pars mīlitum in fīnibus hostium collocātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

32. Puerī malī nōn laudantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

33. Arma Caesarī dabantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

34. Oppidum oppugnābitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

35. Populus Rōmānus adjuvābātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

36. Mīlitēs in mūrō collocantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

37. Fortūna bona laudābātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 43: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #204 contin...

38. Propter grātiam Caesaris frūmentum Rōmānīs datur.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

39. Nōmen Deī semper laudābitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

40. Propter metum vulnerum et mortis, mīlitēs Deum appellant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

41. Mīlitēs in ponte collocantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

42. Jēsūs Chrīstus, Dominus noster, laudābitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 44: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 205 (pg 184)

Translate

1. Pāx saepe propter metum vulnerum et mortis laudātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Erant virī fortēs et līberī in exercitū Caesaris. Eī laudābantur; fortiter enim urbēs et oppida oppugnāvērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Cōnfirmābiturne pāx post proelia et bella et caedēs?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. In perīculō Deus semper appellātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Omnēs rēs fortiter administrābantur quod Caesar, vir fortis et nōbilis, imperātor erat

Rōmānōrum. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 45: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #205 contin...

6.Aut1 Lincoln aut1 Washingtonius prīnceps fuit omnium ducum Americānōrum. Itaque eī

laudantur et semper laudābuntur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Cūr puerī malī nōn laudantur?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Glōria Deō per Jēsūm Chrīstum datur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Mīlitēs et in silvīs et in agrīs collocābantur; in eōs hostēs impetum fēcērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Rēx malus nōn adjuvābitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 46: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3Exercise #205 contin...

11. Mīlitēs propter virtūtem laudantur. Centuriōnēs etiam propter virtūtem et fidem laudantur.

Ducēs et imperātōrēs rēs fortiter administrant. Itaque eī etiam laudantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Chrīstiānī bonī et in pāce et in bellō lēgem Chrīstī servant. Itaque eīs magnum praemium in Caelō dabitur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Vōs estis Americānī. Et līberī et fortēs estis. Itaque semper laudāmini.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________14, Ducēs nōn laudābantur. Longē enim alberant ā proeliīs et castrīs.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1 aut . . . aut: either . . . or

Page 47: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3Exercise 206 (pg 184)Translate:

1. The centurions are being addressed.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. God will be called upon.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. The affair is being managed.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Peace was being strengthened.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Soldiers are being stationed in the fields.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. The cities are being stormed.

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

7. The soldier is being helped.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 48: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #206 contin...

8. Grain will be given the soldiers.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Our friends will be encouraged.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Our soldiers were being helped.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. The army is being strengthened.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Our faith will be strengthened.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. The war is being managed.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14, You will be praised.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 49: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #206 contin...

15. We are being encouraged.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. They were being helped.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 50: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

4. The Ablative of Agent (pg 185 – 191)

When the verb is PASSIVE, the SUBJECT is the person or thing to WHICH the ACTION IS DONE. The PERSON WHO DOES THE ACTION – the LIVING AGENT – is expressed in Latin as in English by a PREPOSITIONAL PHRASE:

Deus ab hominibus laudātur.God is being praised by men.

Bellum ā duce administrātur.The war is being managed by the leader.

The preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h.

Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes the ABLATIVE case.

ab omnibus hominibus, by all menā duce, by the leaderab hominibus, by men

Assignment: Learn the rule, GRAMMAR, No. 764

The Abative of Means

No. 764

ā or ab with the ablative is used to express the LIVING AGENT.

Deus ā Chrīstiānīs laudātur.

God is praised by Christians.

Urbs ā duce oppugnāta est.

The city was attacked by the leader.

Hostēs ab eīs pulsī sunt.

The enemy were routed by them.

Note: Remember that you have already learned a different meaning and use for ab (ā). When ab (ā) is used in a prepositional phrase modifying ABSUM, it must be translated FROM. Thus:

Mōns ā flūmine longē abest.The mountain us far away from the river.

Page 51: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Vocabulary (pg 185)

cōnservō, 1. tr. - preserve, spare

nam, conj. - for (when for means because and introduces a REASON)

ab (ā), prep. w. abl. - by (expressing agency), from (w. absum)

Review Vocabulary (pg 186)

vocō, 1. tr. - call

occupō, 1. tr. – seize

Exercises 207 – 213; Reading No. 7 (pg 186 - 191) – Assigned in Challenge B - #207 - 212

Exercise 207 (pg 186)

Complete these phrases with ā whenever possible; otherwise use ab.

1. by the king ______ rēge

2. by the enemy ______ hostibus

3. by the cavalry ______ equitibus

4. by Mary ______ Marīā

5. by all slaves ______ omnibus servīs

6. by the leader of the enemy ______ hostium duce

Page 52: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 208 (pg 187)

1) Translate 2) Underline the ablatives of the agent:

Warning: One sentence contains a "booby-trap."

1. Pāx ā mīlitibus saepe nōn cōnservātur, nam glōriae bellī cupidī sunt. _____________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

2. Imperium ā Caesare, virō fortī et bonō, administrābitur. ________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

3. Cōpia frūmentī ā servīs nōn cōnservābātur. _________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. Post proelium nōs ab imperātōre cōnfirmābāmur. _____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

5. Laudanturne sānctī hominēs ā virīs bonīs? __________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

6. Rōma ab Americā longē abest._________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 53: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #208 contin...

7. Silvae ab equitibus occupābuntur. _________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

8. Laudāturne Senātus Rōmānus ā multīs virīs. ________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

9. Omnēs rēs ā duce bonō administrābantur. __________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

10. Centuriōnēs ab imperātōre appellābantur._________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

11. Imperātor ā senātū vocābitur. __________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 54: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 209 (pg 187)

Translate

1. Our free state will be preserved by free and brave men. _____________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

2. All the soldiers will be called into the battle by the commander in chief; for the number of

the enemy is large, and they are eager for victory. _____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

3. The faith was being kept by many renowned Christians. ____________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. Many foreign fields were being seized by the Roman soldiers. __________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

5. The leaders of the Gauls were often called by Caesar. ________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

6. The slaves were being called by the master. _______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

7. The American state is being praised by all free men. _______________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 55: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 210 (pg 187)

Translate:

QUESTION. Administrāturne mundus ā Deō?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

ANSWER. Mundus ā Deō et cōnservātur et administrātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Nam Deus in prīncipiō caelum et terram et omnēs rēs propter nōs hominēs fēcit1 et est hominum Pater.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1: fecit: he made

Nōs hominēs ā Deō cōnservāmur, et nōbis omnēs rēs ā Deō dantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 56: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise #210 contin...

Vēritās et salus nōbīs ā Deō dantur; frūmentum et omnium rērum cōpia nōbīs2 ā Deō et parantur et cōnservantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2: Translate: for us

Itaque in mortis perīculō ā nautis Deus appellātur; in bellī perīculis a mīlitibus appellātur; a mātribus et patribus, ā virīs et puerīs, ā Chrīstiānīs et ab omnibus hominibus semper et in omnibus locīs appellātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Nam Deus bonus est, et hominēs ab Eō semper adjuvantur et cōnfirmantur. Itaque Deus semper ab hominibus bonīs et sānctīs laudātur, nam Pater omnium hominum est.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 57: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3

Exercise 211 (pg 188)

Translate

Tum imperium populī Rōmānī a Caesare occupābātur. Vir fortis erat, nam ab eō et hostēs

superābantur et amīcī cōnfirmābantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Post ējus mortem pāx ab imperatōribus Rōmānīs per arma et legiōnēs cōnfirmābātur. Nōn

omnēs autem hominēs līberī erant, nam multī hominēs erant servī miserī.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 58: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W3Exercise #211 contin...

Pāx Rōmāna ab imperātōribus cōnfirmābātur, sed lībertās1 omnium hominum a Rōmānīs

nōn cōnservābātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1: lībertās, lībertātis: liberty (cf. līber)

Exercise 212 (pg 188)Translate

Cīvitās Americāna ā mīlitibus fortibus cōnservātur et semper cōnservābitur. Mīlitēs Americānī

ab hostibus etiam fortibus nōn superābuntur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Virī Americānī propter virtūtem et fidem ā nōbīs et ab omnibus hominibus semper

laudābuntur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________END OF WEEK 3

Page 59: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 4

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

4 Lesson 17 - 19pg 188- 199

246, 249, 252, 765, 247, 250, 253

#213, #216-219, #223-224, Reading No 8 192, 197

Exercises 207 – 213 – Assigned in Challenge B – #213

Exercise 213 (pg 190)[Honor Work]

An Imaginary Speech

Imagine that Rome is at war (and it generally was!). The political opponents of the government are criticizing the war policy of the administration and its generals. A spokesman for the government rises in the Roman Senate and speaks:

Translate into LATIN:

“The war is being managed by a brave leader. Before1 the war, all things were being prepared by him; grain and arms were being carried into the towns of the province by the slaves; hills and bridges were being seized by the legions; the courage of the soldiers was being strengthened by the centurions.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

1: before: ante, prep. w/ acc.

Page 60: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

Exercise 213 cont.

Now, in the dangers of war, the general of the Roman legions is praised by both Roman soldiers and the enemy. For he has frightened the enemy, and their fear is the glory of a Roman general. __________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

Why is he not praised by the Roman Senate? Why is he not helped by you all? GOOD men are now praising him and good men will always praise him.”

__________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

Reply to this speech:

Imagine that you are a leader of one of the parties opposed to the government. Write a short speech in Latin answering the arguments given above. Use words and constructions you know. Do not use any construction about which you are doubtful.

1: before: ante, prep. w/ acc.__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

_

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 61: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

____________________________________________________________________S2W4

LESSON 18: Present System Passive of the Second Conjugation; Ablative of Means (P 192 – 196)

1. Present system passive of the second conjugation (pg 192 - 194)

Assignment: Study the present, imperfect, and future indicative passive of the second conjugation, Grammar Nos 246, 249, and 252. Notice that there is ONE change which does not follow the rules for final personal signs given in Section 2 of Lesson 17. Monēbis becomes monēberis.

No. 246Present Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. mon-eor - I am advised 2. mon-ēris - you are advised 3. mon-ētur - he, she, it are advised

Plural - 1. mon-ēmur - we are advised 2. mon-ēminī- you are advised 3. mon-entur– they are advised

No 249

Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. mon-ēbar - I was being advised 2. mon-ēbāris- you was being advised 3. mon-ēbātur - he, she, it was being advised

Plural - 1. mon-ēbāmur - we were being advised 2. mon-ēbāminī- you were being advised 3. mon-ebāntur– they were being advised

No 252

Future Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. mon-ēbor - I shall be advised 2. mon-ēberis- you will be advised 3. mon-ēbitur - he, she, it will be advised

Plural - 1. mon-ēbimur - we will be advised2. mon-ēbiminī- you will be advised3. mon-ebuntur– they will be advised

Page 62: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

Vocabulary (pg 192)

contineō, continēre, continuī, contentus, 2. tr. - restrain, hold in

obtineō, obtinēre, obtinūi, obtentus, 2. tr. - hold, occupy

aut, conj. - or

aut . . . aut, conj. - either . . . or

neque . . . neque, conj. - neither . . . or

postea, adv. - afterwards

Related English Words

A container.

Related Latin Words

Post: ea.

Review Vocabulary (pg 192)

terreō, 2. tr. - terrify

teneō, tenēre, tenuī, tentus, 2. tr. - hold

videō, vidēre, vīdī, vīsus, 2. tr. - see

Page 63: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

Exercises 214 – 217 (pg 193 – 194) – Assigned in Challenge B - # 216 – 217

Exercise 216 (pg 193)Translate:

1. Hostēs ab equitibus Rōmānīs saepe terrentur. _______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

2. Impetus hostium ā mīlitibus fortibus sustinēbitur. _____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

3. Multī puerī in agrīs vidēbantur. ___________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. Virī nōbilēs et magnī neque terrēbuntur neque superābuntur.____________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

5. Collis mīlitibus integrīs complētur. _________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

6. Reliquī hostēs ā Rōmānīs undique tenēbantur. __________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

7. Posteā signum ā centuriōne movēbitur. ____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

8. Hostēs propter metum gravem terrēbantur. _________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

9. Virī sānctī mortis metū nōn terrēbuntur. ____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 64: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

Exercise 216 cont.

10. Montēs altī undique ab Helvētiīs1 videntur. _________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

11. Hostēs undique continentur. ___________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

12. Locus clāmōre miserōrum mīlitum complēbātur. _____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

13. Posteā imperium ā Caesare obtinēbātur. __________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

14. Rēgnum ā rēge glōriae cupidō saepe obtinētur. _____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

15.Pōns ā mīlitibus fortibus tenētur. _________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

16. Gallī prōvinciae fīnitimī terrentur._________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

17. Propter metum mortis neque movēbantur neque terrēbantur. ___________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

18. Impetus sustinētur. ____________________________________________________________

19. Legiōnēs Rōmānae nōn terrentur. ________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

____________________

Page 65: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

1: Helvētii, Helvētiorum: the Helvetians (inhabitants of ancient Switzerland)

S2W4

Exercise 216 cont.

20. Rōmānī ā Gallīs, virīs fortibus, nōn terrentur. _______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

21. Omnēs mīlitēs in castrīs continēbuntur. ____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

22. Posteā castra trāns flūmen movēbuntur. ___________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

23. Puer terrēbātur quod ā patre et mātre longē āfuit. ___________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

24. Virī līberī nōn continēbantur. ____________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

25. Oppidum frūmentī plēnum obtinēbitur. _____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 66: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

Exercise 217 (pg 194)

Translate:

1. The soldiers were being restrained by the commander in chief. __________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

2. The power is being held by Caesar. _______________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

3. The enemy are being terrified by the cavalry. ________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. The Roman column will be seen by the Gauls. _______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

5. The town will be either held by us or seized by the enemy. _____________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

6. The bridge is being held by the cavalry. ____________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

7. Afterwards the royal power will be held by him. ___________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

8. We shall be terrified neither by the soldiers nor by the cavalry.___________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

9. They were being held in by the cavalry. ____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 67: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

2. The Ablative of Means (pg 194 - 196)

We have seen that the living agent is expressed by ab (ā) with the ablative.

The ablative WITHOUT A PREPOSITION is used to express:

1. The NON-LIVING AGENT.

Montibus continēbantur. They were held in by mountains.

(BUT: Ab hoste continēbantur. They were being held in by the enemy.)

2. The MEANS or INSTRUMENT with which something is done.

Rōmānī tēlīs hīberna dēfendērunt. The Romans defended the winter quarter with/by means of darts.

Assignment: Learn the rule, Grammar, No. 765

The Abative of Means

No. 765

The ablative without a preposition is used to express the non-living agent, the means, or the instrument.

Rōmānī tēlīs hīberna dēfendērunt.The Romans defended the winter quarter with darts.

Castra fossā mūnivērunt.They fortified the camp with/by means of a ditch.

Montibus continēbantur.They were held in by mountains.

Tēlīs terrentur.They are being terrified by darts.

Page 68: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4Exercises 218 – 219; Reading No. 8. (pg 195-196) – Assigned in Ch B -# 218 – 219, Reading #8

Exercise 218 (pg 195)

1) Translate 2) Explain the italicized cases:

1. Chrīistiānī Deum et vōce et virtūte laudant. __________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

2. Rōmānī Chrīstiānōs gladiīs nōn vīcērunt.____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

3. Rēs Rōmāna armīs et virtūte cōnservābātur. _________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. Rōmānī hīberna tēlīs et gladiīs semper dēfendērunt. __________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

5. Virtūs equitum fortium praemiīs cōnfirmābātur. _______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

6. Interim centuriōnēs litterīs Caesaris monēbuntur._____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

7. Helvētiī1 montibus altīs et magnō flūmine undique continentur. __________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 69: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

______________________________________________________________________________1

Helvetii: the Helvetians, a Celtic tribe living in Switzerland who became known as the Swiss.

S2W4

Exercise 219 (pg 195)

All prepositional phrases in these sentences use the ablative of means.Translate:

1. They defended the camp with darts.

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

2. The soldiers’ courage will be strengthened by the centurion’s speech. ___________________

______________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________________

3. They fought with swords. _______________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. The Roman state was being preserved by the courage of the Roman Sentate and people.

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

5.The Romans fortified cities by means of walls.

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

Page 70: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

Reading No. 8 (pg 195)

Hannibal Annihilates a Roman Army!

Victōria Hannibalis magna fuit. Senātus Populusque Rōmānus tamen pācem nōn petēbat. Integrās cōpiās parāvērunt. Arma et tēla parābantur.

A new general, Gaius Flaminius, was now in command of the Roman forces. Hannibal crossed the Apennines into Etruria, marched through terrain made almost impassable by the spring rains, and took up a strong position before Flaminius, who had planned to block the mountain passes, knew he had managed the crossing. Hannibal, to incite the Romans to fight on his own terms, marched past the Roman camp, pillaging, and wasting the land all around. This was too much for the headstrong Flaminius. Though his army was inferior, he pursued the Carthaginians. The road along which the Carthaginians were marching enters, as it skirts Lake Trasimene, a narrow strip of plain enclosed by surrounding hills which come close down to the shore of the lake. Here Hannibal took up a strong position to await the pursuing Romans.

In colle Hannibal magnum numerum mīlitum collocāvit; equitēs autem in dextrā1 et sinistrā2

parte collocāvit. (Besides, a mist concealed his positions.)

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Itaque imperātor Rōmānus, proeliī et victōriae cupidus, exercitum Rōmānum in loca angusta dūxit. Subitō3 Rōmānī hostēs vīdērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 71: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_1 dexter, dextra, dextrum: right. 2 sinister, sinistra, sinistrum: left. 3 subito, adv.: suddenly

S2W4 Reading No 8. cont.

Undique ab hostibus continēbantur. Nōn erat spēs salūtis. Rōmānī et tēlis terrēbantur et ab equitibus perturbābantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Tum hostēs undique in Rōmānōs impetum fēcērunt. Caedēs Rōmānōrum magna fuit. Locus

clāmōre Rōmānōrum miserōrum complēbātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Pars tamen Rōmānōrum per hostēs vēnit. Eōs autem equitēs hostium posteā

occīdērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

In this battle—a slaughter rather than a battle—the Romans lost an entire army, 15,000 killed and 15,000 captured. The Carthaginians lost only 1,500 men, and these mainly from their Gallic auxiliaries.

Victōria hostium magna fuit. Perīculum Rōmānōrum grave erat. Tamen etiam tum Rōmānī dē pāce cum hostibus nōn ēgērunt. Spem salūtis in virtūte pōnēbant.__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 72: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

__________________________________________________________________________

As an officer in Caesar’s army was to say later, “Romans never ask terms of peace from an armed foe.” Such was the invincible spirit of Rome.

S2W4

Lesson 19: PRESENT SYSTEM PASSIVE OF THE THIRD CONJUGATION (p 197 – 207)

1. Present system passive of the third conjugation (p 197 – 199)

The rules for changes in the final personal signs apply also to the present system indicative PASSIVE of the THIRD conjugation.

Assignment: Learn the model verbs, Grammar, Nos. 247, 250 and 253.

No. 247

Present Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. mitt-eor - I am sent 2. mitt-eris - you are sent 3. mitt-itur - he, she, it are sent

Plural - 1. mitt-imur - we are sent 2. mitt-iminī- you are sent 3. mitt-untur– they are sent

No. 250

Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. mitt-ēbar - I was being sent 2. mitt-ēbāris- you was being sent 3. mitt-ēbātur - he, she, it was being sent

Plural - 1. mitt-ēbāmur - we were being sent 2. mitt-ēbāminī- you were being sent 3. mitt-ebāntur– they were being sent

No. 253

Future Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. mitt-ar - I shall be sent

Page 73: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

2. mitt-ēris- you will be sent 3. mitt-ētur - he, she, it will be sent

Plural - 1. mitt-ēbāmur - we will be sent 2. mitt-ēminī- you will be sent 3. mitt-entur– they will be sent

S2W4Vocabulary (pg 197)

trādō, trādere, trādidī, trāditus, 3, tr. - hand over

dīmittō, dīmittere, dīmīsī, dīmissus, 3. tr – send away, dismiss

occīdō, occīdere, occīdī, occīsus, 3. tr. - kill

sine, prep. w. abl. - without

ferē, adv. - almost

Review Vocabulary (pg 197)

dēfendō, dēfendere, dēfendī, dēfēnsus, 3, tr – defend

dūcō, dūcere, dūxī, ductus, 3, tr – lead, guide

pellō, pellere, pepulī, pulsus, 3. tr - drive, repulse, rout

vincō, vincere, vīcī, victus, 3, tr – conquer

agō, agere, ēgī, āctus, 3, tr - drive, do, act, treat, give (w. grātiās)

Note: The phrase grātiās agō means I give thanks or I thank and takes an indirect object.

Tībi grātiās agimus. We thank you. (We give thanks to you).

Page 74: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4

Exercise 220 – 224 (p 198 – 199) – Assigned in Ch B - # 223 – 224

Exercise 223 (pg 198)Translate

1. Prīncipēs hostium senātuī trāduntur.______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

2. Gallus occīditur. ______________________________________________________

3. Homō malus ā senātū occīdetur.__________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

4. Italia ā Rōmānīs dēfenditur.______________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

5. Gallī et pellentur et occīdentur.___________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

6. Agmen in fīnēs hostium dūcitur. __________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

7. Grātiae Deō aguntur. ________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

8. Equitēs in gentēs fīnitimās dīmittēbantur. __________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

Page 75: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

9. Vōs in Galliam mittiminī.________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

10. Rōma dēfendētur. ___________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________S2W4

Exercise 223 cont. 11. Servī saepe occīduntur. _____________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________

12. Omnēs ferē gentēs fīnitimae vincuntur.____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

13. Agmen ā Caesare dūcitur. ____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

14. Hostēs tamen vincentur. _______________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

15. Urbs hostibus nōn trādētur. ____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

16. Equitēs in gentēs reliquās dīmittuntur. ____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

17. Castra tēlis dēfendēbantur. _____________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

18. Rōmāni neque pellentur neque occīdentur. ________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

19. Rēgēs glōriae cupidī cum gentibus fīnitimis bellum saepe gerunt. _______________

Page 76: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

______________________________________________________________________

20. Frūmenta in agrīs saepe incenduntur. ____________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

Page 77: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W4Exercise 224 (pg 199)

Translate:

1. The enemy’s cavalry was being killed by darts. __________________________

__________________________________________________________________

2. The Senate is being dismissed. ________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

3.Almost all of the swords and darts will be handed over by the leaders of the Gauls.

__________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

4. Almost all the tribes of Gaul were being conquered by the Romans. ___________

__________________________________________________________________

5. Our cities and towns are being defended by brave soldiers. __________________

__________________________________________________________________

6. The army will be led into Gaul by the general. ____________________________

__________________________________________________________________

7. The enemy’s cavalry will be repulsed by our cavalry. _______________________

__________________________________________________________________

8. The Gauls were fighting without hope. __________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

9. Thanks are being given to the Senate. ___________________________________

__________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 4

Page 78: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 5

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

5 Lesson 19-21

pg 199-210

248, 251, 254, 772, 255-266

#225-226, #228-229, #231, #233-234,

Read No. 10

202, 209

2. Ablatives of Agency and Means Compared (p 199 – 201)

Study these differences between the ablative of agency and the ablative of means:

THE ABLATIVE OF THE AGENT1. ALWAYS has the preposition ab (ā) in Latin.2. ALWAYS expresses a LIVING AGENT (a person, soldiers, Caesar, lions, an army, etc)3. ALWAYS has the preposition by in English.

Deus ā Chrīstiānīs laudātur. God is (being) praised by Christians.

THE ABLATIVE OF MEANS:1. NEVER has a preposition in Latin.2. Generally expressed a THING (a sword, courage, shouting, etc)3. Generally has by or with in English

Servī tēlīs (gladiō) occīdēbantur. The slaves were being killed by darts (with a sword).

Page 79: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S1W5 Exercises - 225 – 226; Reading No. 9 (pg 200 - 201) - Assigned in Ch B - #225, 226

Exercise 225 (pg 200)

1) Translate

2) Explain the italicized forms:

Warning! One sentence conceals several "booby-traps."

1. Silvae saepe in bellō ab hostibus incenduntur. ___________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Rōma virtūte legiōnum cōnservābātur. _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Centuriōnēs in omnēs ferē gentēs fīnitimās ā Caesare dīmittuntur. ___________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Cōpiae Rōmānae ā Gallīs nōn pelluntur. ________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Virtūs mīlitum spē victōriae semper cōnfirmātur. __________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 80: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 225 cont.

6. Post proelium prīncipēs hostium ā Rōmānīs saepe occīdēbantur._____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Prīncipēs ā Caesare nōn dīmittentur. __________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Tēlīs occīditur. __________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

9. Mīles Rōmānus hostem videt. Eum tēlīs occīdit. ________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

10. Mīlitēs undique dūcentur; castra in colle pōnentur; arma et frūmentum in castra portābuntur.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 81: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5Exercise 226 (pg 200)

1. Translate 2. Explain the italicized forms.

Warning: Some of these sentences have the ablative of means; others have the ablative of agency.

1. All things were being attended to by the general. _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. They fortified the camp with a wall. __________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

3. He killed the leading men with a sword. ______________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

4. Peace was being strengthened by the courage of the legions. _____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. They were being defended by Roman cavalry. _________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. The city was being handed over by the Gauls. _________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

7. He conquered the enemy by the courage of the Roman soldiers. __________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 82: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

8. The leading men are being sent away by the Roman general.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

S2W5

LESSON 20: PRESENT SYSTEM PASSIVE OF THE FOURTH CONJUGATION:

ACCOMPANIMENT (pg 202 – 207)

1. Present System Passive of the Fourth Conjugation (p 202-203)

The Rules for final personal signs in the passive apply also to the fourth conjugation

Assignment: Study Grammar, Nos 248, 251 and 254

No 248

Present Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. aud-ior - I am heard 2. aud-īris - you are heard 3. aud-ītur - he, she, it are heard

Plural - 1. aud-īmur - we are heard2. aud-īminī- you are heard3. aud-iuntur– they are heard

No. 251

Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. aud-iēbar - I was being heard 2. aud-iēbāris- you was being heard 3. aud-iēbātur - he, she, it was being heard

Plural - 1. aud-iēbāmur - we were being heard 2. aud-iēbāminī- you were being heard 3. aud-iebāntur– they were being heardNo. 254Future Tense (Present Stem)

Singular – 1. aud-iar - I shall be heard

Page 83: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

2. aud-iēris- you will be heard 3. aud-iētur - he, she, it will be heard

Plural - 1. aud-iēmur - we will be heard2. aud-iēminī- you will be heard3. aud-ientur– they will be heard

S2W5

Review Vocabulary (p 202)

audiō, 4, tr. - hear

mūniō, 4. tr. - fortify, construct (w. viam or viās)

veniō, venīre, vēnī, ventum, 4. intr. - come

conveniō, convenīre, convēnī, conventum, 4, intr. - come together, assemble

Exercises 227 – 228 (p 202-203) – Assigned in Ch B #228

Exercise 228 (pg 202)

1) Translate

2) Explain the construction of the italicized words:

1. Castra ā Rōmānīs semper mūniēbantur.

______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. Quid ā vōbīs audītur? _____________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

3. Cum Caesare per montēs in Galliam vēnī. ____________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 84: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

_________________________________________________________________________________

4. Urbs ā rēge victōriae cupidō mūnītur. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 85: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 228 cont.

5. Chrīstō, Fīliō Deī, grātiās agimus. ___________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. Interim et collēs et pontēs ā legiōnibus mūniēbantur. _____________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

7. Fuit metus in castrīs quod clāmor hostium audiēbātur. __________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

8. Puerīs malīs praemia nōn dabuntur. _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

9. Ubi est Rōma? __________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 86: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes
Page 87: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 228 cont.

10. Fīlius saepe est patris similis. _____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

11. Gentēs fīnibus hostium fīnitimae saepe cōpiam armōrum petunt. _________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

12. Fuitne Lincoln Washingtoniō similis? _______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

13. Legiōnēs integrae in hostēs mittuntur._______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

14. Clāmor nautārum reliquōrum audiēbātur. ____________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

15. Marīa est grātiā plēna. ___________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 88: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 228 cont.

16. Silvae perīculōrum plēnae sunt. ___________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

17. Propter hostium metum legiōnēs prō portīs īnstruēbantur. _______________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

18. Urbs mūrō mūnītur. _____________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

19. Quis prō rēge pugnābit? __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

20. Impedīmenta magna erant.________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 89: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 228 cont.

21. Post bellum fuit pāx. ___________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

22. Caesar fuit Rōmānōrum imperātor. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

23. Loca angusta et difficilia fuērunt. ___________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

24. Rōma ā Galliā longē abest. _______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

25. Oppidum mīlitibus complēbātur. ____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

26. Mīles similis ducī nōn erat. ________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 90: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 228 cont.

27. Rōmānī Rōmam virtūte et armīs semper dēfendērunt. __________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

28. Cūr iter per montēs nōn fēcērunt? __________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

29. Mīlitēs undique tēla in hostēs mīsērunt. ______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

30. Dux rēgnum occupāvit. __________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 91: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

2. ABLATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT (p 203 – 207)

Do not confuse the ABLATIVE OF MEANS with the ABLATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT

When with expresses association, pointing out the person or thing in company with wich something is or is done, the ABLATIVE WITH CUM MUST BE USED. This is called the ABLATIVE OF ACCOMPANIMENT.

He came with the Roman.Cum Rōmānō vēnit(I.E. He came IN COMPANY WITH the Roman.)

The swords are in the camp with the darts.Gladiī in castrīs CUM TELIS sunt.(i.e. They are TOGETHER WITH the darts.)

(BUT: He is being killed with a sword. Gladiō occīditur.)

(I.e. He is being killed BY MEANS OF A SWORD. The sword is the instrument or means).

Assignment: Learn the rule for accompaniment in Grammar. No 772

No. 772

The Ablative of Accompaniment

Cum with the ablative is used to express accompaniment or association.

Lēgātus cum Caesare vēnit.

The envoy came in company with (together with, with) Caesar.

Ūnā cum eīs proficīscuntur.

They set out with them.

Germānī sēsē cum hīs conjūnxērunt.

The Germans united themselves with these.

(i.e. The Germans joined these.)

Page 92: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 229; Reading No 10 (p 204 - 207) – Assigned in Ch B - #229, Reading No 10

Exercise 229 (pg 204)

Some of the with-phrases are to be translated using Ablative of MEANS;

others, the Ablative of ACCOMPANIMENT. Translate.

1. They fought with swords. _________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

2. Caesar was fighting with the Gauls.

______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

3. The cavalry was in the camp with the soldiers.

_______________________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________________

4. The camp was being fortified with a wall.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. Jesus is in heaven with God. _______________________________________________________

6. They terrified the cavalry with (their) shouting.

_______________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________

Page 93: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Reading No. 10 (pg 204-207

The Battle of Zama - Hannibal's Last Stand

Et Hannibal et Scīpiō miīlitēs īnstrūxērunt. Virtūs et spēs mīlitum ōrātiōnibus imperātōrum

cōnfirmābantur. “Spem in virtūte pōnēmus! Fortiter pugnābimus! Aut vincēmus

aut vincēmur!”

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 94: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Reading No. 10 cont.

Hannibal lined up his eighty elephants in front of his main army. In the first line behind them he placed his 12,000 mercenary troops, men drawn from many lands and held together by devotion to their great leader. In the second line he stationed 15,000 new Carthaginian levies. Behind these he held in reserve 20,000 veteran troops to strike the final blow for victory. The cavalry were massed on either flank. (see diagram: Phases I and II)

Hannibal signum dedit. Elephantī1 in aciem Rōmānam mittēbantur. (see diagram: Phases I and II)

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1 elephantus, i: elephant

Scipio, however, had arranged his men so as to leave lanes between his troops. The soldiers thus easily shifted to allow the elephants to run harmlessly between them.

Itaque elephantī1 neque Rōmānōs terruērunt neque aciem perturbāvērunt. (See diagram: Phases I and II.)

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Interim equitēs Rōmānī in equitēs hostium impetum fēcērunt. Hostēs autem impetum nōn

sustinuērunt. Itaque equitēs hostium cessērunt.__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 95: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Reading No. 10 cont.

Thus both cavalries rushed off the field as Hannibal had probably planned. (See diagram: Phases I and II.)

Tum prīma aciēs hostium in Rōmānōs ab Hannibale mittēbatur. (See diagram: Phase

III.) Rēs gladiō gerēbatur. Et Rōmānī et hostēs fortiter pugnābant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Vōcēs et clāmor hominum undique audiēbantur. Multī et hostēs et Rōmānī tēlīs et gladiīs

occīdēbantur. Mīlitēs tamen Rōmānī impetum sustinēbant.__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Itaque et Scīpiō et Hannibal integrōs mīlitēs in proelium misērunt. (See diagram: Phase IV.)

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Rōmānī autem ā mīlitibus integrīs nōn superabantur. Itaque hostēs in magnō perīculō

erant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 96: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Reading No. 10 cont.

Both armies were now in great confusion and both attempted to re-form. Hannibal pushed his third line of veterans to the front and rejoined battle. (See diagram on page 205: Phase V.) The battle raged on through long and bloody hours. Finally the Roman cavalry, having left off pursuit, probably according to instructions, returned to the field.

Tum equitēs Rōmānī ā tergō2 impetum in hostēs fēcērunt. (See diagram: Phase

VI.) Itaque hostēs ā Rōmānīs undique continēbantur.________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Magna erat caedēs hostium miserōrum. Rōmānī enim omnēs ferē hostēs aut occīdērunt

aut cēpērunt.3 (Hannibal, however, escaped capture and fled from the field.)__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Post proelium hostēs pācem petīvērunt. Ita, post multās hostium victōriās et magnam

Rōmānōrum caedem, Rōmānī hostēs virtūte et armīs vicērunt.__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________

2 a tergo: from the rear3 ceperunt: (they) captured

Page 97: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

LESSON 21: THE PERFECT SYSTEM OF THE INDICATIVE PASSIVE (P 208 – 216)

The perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses passive are COMPOUND tenses in Latin. They are formed by using the PERFECT PARTICIPLE PASSIVE as a predicate adjective with the verb sum, am.

The PERFECT indicative passive is compounded of the perfect participle passive (the fourth principal part in -us) and the present indicative fo the verb to be.

The perfect participle passive is declined like magnus, a, um and agrees with the subject of the sentence, just like a predicate adjective. Explain all the underlined endings in these examples:

Ego laudātus sum. I was praised.Tū laudātus es. You were praised.Marīa ā Chrīstiānīs laudāta est. Mary was praised by the Christians.Nōs laudāti sumus. We were praised.Vōs laudāti estis. You were praised.Mīlitēs laudāti sunt. The soldiers were praised.Mātrēs laudātae sunt. The mothers were praised.Flūmina laudāta sunt. The rivers were praised.

In forming the PERFECT SYSTEM OF THE PASSIVE in all conjugations follow this rule:

1. Take the PERFECT PARTICIPLE PASSIVE of the verb (the fourth principal part of transitive verbs).2. Add, as a separate word, the required form of the verb sum.

Assignment : Study the model verbs, Grammar, Nos 255 – 266

No. 255

Passive Voice - Indicative Mood. Perfect Tense.(Perfect participle passive with sum, etc.)

Singular laudātus (a, um) sum I was praised ( I have been praised)

Singular laudātus (a, um) es You were praised (you have been praised)

Singular laudātus (a, um) est He, she, it was praised (He, she it has been praised)

Plural laudātī (ae, a) sumus We were praised. (We have been praised)

Plural laudātī (ae, a) estis You were praised. (You have been praised)

Plural laudātī (ae, a) sunt They were praised. (They have been praised)

Page 98: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

No. 256Passive Voice - Indicative Mood. Pluperfect Tense.(Perfect participle passive with eram, etc.)

Singular laudātus (a, um) eram I had been praised

Singular laudātus (a, um) erām You had been praised.

Singular laudātus (a, um) erat He, she, it had been praised.

Plural laudātī (ae, a) erāmus We had been praised.

Plural laudātī (ae, a) erātis You had been praised.

Plural laudātī (ae, a) erant They had been praised.

No. 257Passive Voice - Indicative Mood. Future Perfect Tense.(Perfect participle passive with erō , etc.)

Singular laudātus (a, um) erō I shall have been praised

Singular laudātus (a, um) eris You will have been praised.

Singular laudātus (a, um) erit He, she, it will have been praised.

Plural laudātī (ae, a) erimus We shall have been praised.

Plural laudātī (ae, a) eritis You will have been praised.

Plural laudātī (ae, a) erunt They will have been praised.

No. 258 – 266 - Same as No 255 – 257 but with verbsSingular – monitus (a, um) Plural - monitī (ae, a) - advisedSingular – missus (a, um) Plural - missī (ae, a) – sentSingular – audītus (a, um) Plural - audītī (ae, a) – heard

Page 99: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Vocabulary (p 209)

vehementer, adv. - greatly, violently

explōrō, 1. tr. - reconnoiter, find out

premō, premere, pressī, pressus, 3, tr. - press, press hard

retineō, retinēre, retinuī, retentus, 2, tr – hold back, keep

comparō, 1, tr. - get, prepare

Page 100: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5 Exercise 231 (pg 209) Give the perfect participle passive (the fourth principal part) of:1 laudō 24 moveō

2 moneō 25 vocō

3 superō 26 comparō

4 habeō 27 retineō

5 portō 28 occīdō

6 dēfendō 29 explōrō

7 occupō 30 dīmittō

8 dūcō 31 sustineō

9 gerō 32 pōnō

10 oppugnō 33 mūniō

11 trādō 34 collocō

12 audiō 35 cōnfirmō

13 terreō 36 incendō

14 īnstruō 37 adjuvō

15 mittō 38 videō

16 compleō 39 pellō

17 parō 40 perturbō

18 vincō 41 obtineō

19 appellō 42 cōnservō

20 petō 43 incitō

21 dō 44 servō

22 agō 45 contineō

23 administrō 46 premō

Page 101: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5 Exercise 233 (pg 210)

Add the proper endings to the participles and translate:

Note: Remember that in a compound tense the perfect participle passive agrees in number and gender with the subject of the sentence.

1. Vōs laudāt_________ estis.

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Oppidum trādit________ est.

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Prīncipēs retent_________ sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Cōpia frūmentī comparāt_________ est.

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Omnia loca explōrāt_________ sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Hostēs press________ sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Tū laudāt__________ es.

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Nōs laudāt_______ sumus.

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Vōcēs audīt________ sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Nautae retent________ sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Exercitus superāt_______ est.

_________________________________________________________________________

12. Castra mōt_______ sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 102: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W5

Exercise 234 (pg 210)

Add the proper form of the verb sum:

1. You have been praised. Vōs laudātī____________.

2. They have been conquered. Victī____________.

3. You have been warned. Tū monitus_____________.

4. The courage of the soldiers has been strengthened. Virtūs mīlitum cōnfirmāta_________.

5. All the places had been reconnoitered. Omnia loca explōrāta____________.

6. We had been held back. Nōs retentī_____________.

7. It has been prepared. Comparātum____________.

8. The camp has been fortified. Castra mūníta _____________.

END OF WEEK 5

MASTER REVIEW VOCABULARY NO. 2 (pg 217 - 224)

Page 103: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 6

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

6 Lesson 21-22

pg 211 - 231

186, 194-196, 352 #235 – 237, Read No. 11 (Lesson 21)

# 239 – 246 (Lesson 22)

227, 230

Exercise 235 (pg 211) Translate:

1. Vōs laudātī erātis. _________________________________________________________

2. Tū monitus es.____________________________________________________________

3. Equitēs superātī sunt. ______________________________________________________

4. Pōns incēnsus est. ________________________________________________________

5. Frūmentum portātum est. ___________________________________________________

6. Castra dēfēnsa sunt. ______________________________________________________

7. Omnia ferē loca occupāta erant. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Eī pulsī sunt. _____________________________________________________________

9. Ductī sumus. _____________________________________________________________

10. Ea gesta sunt. ___________________________________________________________

11. Oppidum oppugnātum erat. _________________________________________________

12. Arma eīs trādita sunt. _____________________________________________________

13. Audītī estis. _____________________________________________________________

Page 104: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 235 cont.

14. Vehementer territī erāmus. _________________________________________________

15. Mīlitēs īnstructī sunt. ______________________________________________________

16. Litterae missae sunt. ______________________________________________________

17. Mōns hominibus complētus erat. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

18. Tēla parāta sunt. _________________________________________________________

19. Victī sumus. ____________________________________________________________

20. Appellātī erātis. __________________________________________________________

21. Pāx petīta est. ___________________________________________________________

22. Frūmentum eīs datum est. __________________________________________________

23. Actum est. ______________________________________________________________

24. Rēs administrāta est. ______________________________________________________

25. Castra mōta erant. ________________________________________________________

26. Centuriōnēs vocātī erant. __________________________________________________

27. Gallī pressī sunt. _________________________________________________________

Page 105: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 235 cont. 28. Cōpia tēlōrum comparāta erat. ______________________________________________

29. Ducēs retentī sunt. _______________________________________________________

30. Occīsī sunt. _____________________________________________________________

31. Montēs explōrātī erant. ____________________________________________________

32. Prīncipēs dīmissī erant. ____________________________________________________

33. Impetus sustentus erat. ____________________________________________________

34. Spēs in virtūte posita est. __________________________________________________

35. Oppidum mūnītum est. ____________________________________________________

36. Legiōnēs ibi collocātae sunt. ________________________________________________

37. Omnēs rēs comparātae erant. _______________________________________________

38. Pāx cōnfirmāta est. ______________________________________________________

39. Territī sumus. ___________________________________________________________

40. Frūmenta in agrīs incēnsa sunt. _____________________________________________

41. Adjūtus sum. ____________________________________________________________

42. Pulsī estis. ______________________________________________________________

Page 106: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 235 cont. 43. Vīsus es. _______________________________________________________________

44. Pulsus est. _____________________________________________________________

45. Vehementer perturbātus eram. ______________________________________________

46. Obtentum est imperium. ___________________________________________________

47. Lēx cōnservāta nōn est. ___________________________________________________

48. Gentēs fīnitimae incitātae erant. _____________________________________________

49. Legiō prīma pressa est. ____________________________________________________

50. Signum servātum erat. ____________________________________________________

51. Undique contentī sumus __________________________________________________

52. Pressī sunt. _____________________________________________________________

Page 107: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 236 (pg 211)

Translate.

1. I was praised by Caesar. ___________________________________________________

2. You were warned by the slave. ______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

3. We were conquered by the enemy. ___________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

4. A large number of slaves was had by the Romans. _______________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

5. Grain had been carried into the winter quarters. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

6. The town had been bravely defended. ________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

7. The hills were seized by the cavalry. __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

8. The Romans were led by a brave general. _____________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

9. War had been waged with the Gauls. _________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

10. The city had been attacked. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 108: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 236 cont.

11. We were handed over to the enemy by the leader. ______________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

12. The speech was heard by the chiefs. ________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

13. You had been terrified by the darts. _________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

14. The legions were drawn up by Caesar. _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

15. The letter was sent by the chief. ___________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

16. The wall was filled with men. ______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

17. Arms had been gotten. ___________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

18. We were not conquered. __________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

19. God had been called upon. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

20. Peace was sought. ______________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 109: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 236 cont.

21. The swords were given to the soldiers. _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

22. The enemy was driven into the forest. _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

23. The war was managed by a brave general. ____________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

24. The camp had been moved into a safe place. __________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

25. The centurions had been called by the general. ________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

26. The enemy was routed by darts. ____________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

27. All things had been got ready. _____________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

28. The king had been held back. ______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

29. The leaders had been killed by swords. ______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

30. All the places had been reconnoitered. _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

31. The slaves were dismissed. _______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 110: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 236 cont.

32. The attack was withstood. _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

33. The camp had been pitched there. __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

34. The camp was fortified with a wall. __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

35. A horseman had been stationed on the bridge. ________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

36. Peace had been strengthened. _____________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

37. The grain had been burned by the Romans. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

38. They were helped by both slaves and free men. ________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

39. Soldiers had assembled. __________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

40. He had been seen by the horseman. ________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

41. The cavalry were repulsed. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 111: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 236 cont.

42. The first battle line was disturbed. ___________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

43. The royal power was held by a good man. _____________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

44. The state had been preserved by brave men. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

45. The legion was sent into the camp. __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

46. The faith had been kept by many Christians. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

47. The soldiers were restrained by the leaders. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 112: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 237 (pg 211)Translate.

OMNIA BELLA SIMILIA SUNT

1. Propter bellum gladiī et tēla ā Rōmānīs comparāta erant; hodīē1 etiam multa et magna arma ab Americānīs compārantur. ______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

2. In castrīs Rōmānōrum saepe fuit magna omnium rērum inopia; in castrīs Americānīs etiam saepe est rērum inopia. ______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

3. In bellīs Rōmānōrum omnia loca ab equitibus saepe explōrāta sunt; in bellīs autem hodiernīs2 omnia loca ab aviātōribus3 explōrantur. ______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

4. Tum hostēs ab equitātū saepe pressī sunt; hodiē1 hostēs ab armigerīs4 premuntur.______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

5. Bellum Gallicum5 ā Caesare administrātum est. Quis bellum commūne hodiē1 administrat?

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

6. Caesar, imperātor Rōmānōrum, propter victōriam laudātus est. Laudābunturne ducēs Americānī propter victōriam? ______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

__________________________

1 hodie: today; 2 hodiernus, a, um: modern; 3 aviator, oris: airman; 4 armigerum, i: tank; 5 Gallicus, a, um; Gallic

Page 113: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

READING No. 11. Pictures from the Past

An imaginary interview with a Centurion.

The professor cleared his throat. We waited expectantly. “Gentlemen,” he said, “I

have invited you here tonight to see the first demonstration of my electrical wave detector.

This machine cannot only gather and combine into a picture the waves being sent off from

any part of the earth at the present time, but it can detect even the smallest remnants of

waves which, sent off at some past time, are yet vibrating in the universal medium of all

electrical waves. However, this is not an explanation of a theory but a demonstration of

success. Watch carefully. I set this control for time (with growing excitement we watched

him turning the dial), and this (he began moving a larger dial on the huge machine) for

space. Now I throw the power switch. (A large screen or mirror became suddenly illumined

with splotches of changing colors.) This should put our picture at approximately 58 B.C.

somewhere in southern Gaul. “I have not yet,” he added apologetically, “succeeded in

exactly correlating my controls with the longitudes and latitudes of the earth’s surface.” As

he was speaking, the screen had focused into a very realistic picture of a wild forest. The

movement of a breeze through the trees was quite discernible. There was a gasp of

astonishment, but the professor held up his hand. “Now,” he said, “I set the sound control.”

A roar of static rose from a speaker to the left of the screen, then settled down to the quiet

sounds of a forest—no, there was something else—growing louder—the sound of horses

and the clang of metal. Then, before our amazed eyes, a troop of cavalry rode onto the

scene. The leader, a bronzed, sturdy man who rode his horse with the assurance of long

custom, halted, and gazed off to the left. In the silence that followed we heard something

Page 114: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Reading No. 11 cont.

else—distant cries, a shouting as if a whole army were in an uproar—then, yes, the

centurion (he looked just like a picture of a centurion I had seen in a high school Latin book)

turned his head in our direction. He became paralyzed with amazement. But the professor

was almost leaping with excitement. “He sees us! It works! It works!” He rushed to the

machine and began pulling several levers. “Perhaps,” he muttered, “perhaps the sound can

be reversed too, but then, . . . “ He stepped back and cleared his throat.

“Estisne vōs” (yes, the professor had been a good Latin student in high school), “estisne

vōs mīlitēs Rōmānī?” (We held our breath. Slowly the paralysis of surprise passed, and

we saw the centurion open his mouth . . . yes, then we heard): _______________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

CENTURIO: Nōs equitēs Rōmānī sumus. Vōs autem . . . __________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR (excitedly interrupting him): Ubi estis? ______________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

CENTURIO: In Galliā sumus. In agrīs hostium sumus. Nunc, sīcut vidētis, in magnīs silvīs

sumus. __________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR: Quis imperātor vester est? _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 115: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Reading No. 11 cont.

CENTURIO: Caesar, vir et nōbilis et fortis, imperātor noster est. Bellum ab eō fortiter

administrātur. ____________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR: Bellum? Geriturne bellum? ____________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

CENTURIO: Ita. Cum Gallīs legiōnēs Rōmānae nunc pugnant. (He pointed off to the left.)

Audīturne ā vōbīs clāmor et hostium et Rōmānōrum? ____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR: Parāvēruntne Gallī bellum? Erantne cupidī bellī? _____________________

_________________________________________________________________________

CENTURIO: Ita. Victōriae et bellī glōriae cupidī erant. Itaque ante1 bellum arma et tela ā

Gallīs parāta sunt. Virtus eōrum ā ducibus et prīncipibus cōnfirmāta est. Oppida et urbes ab

eīs mūnītae sunt. Frūmentum in oppida et ā Gallīs et ab eōrum servīs portātum est. Ita

omnes rēs parātae erant.

________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR: Quid autem nunc agunt Gallī?

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 116: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Reading No. 11 cont.

CENTURIO: Tēlīs et armīs oppida et agrōs dēfendunt. Collēs et pontēs ab eīs occupantur,

nam bellum nōbīscum gerunt.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR: Et Caesar? Quid is ante1 bellum ēgit?

_________________________________________________________________________

CENTURIO: Castra in colle ab eō posita sunt. Frūmentum in castra ā servīs portātum est.

Arma et tēla etiam ab eō parāta sunt. Equitēs ā Caesare in fīnēs hostium dīmittēbantur.

Omnia loca ab eīs explōrāta sunt. Castra nostra mūrō mūnīvimus. Caesar virtūtem et spem

mīlitum ōrātiōne et praemiīs cōnfirmāvit.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR: Vincenturne Gallī ā vōbis?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

1 ante, prep. w/accus.: before

Page 117: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Reading No. 11 cont.

CENTURIO: Ita. (He roared with laughter.) Gallī fortiter pugnant, sed nōs nōn vincent. Nōs

armīs et virtūte eōs vincēmus. Rōmānī enim neque vincuntur neque dē pāce cum hostibus

agunt. En!2 (He pointed towards the shouting.) Jam3 nunc a mīlitibus Rōmānīs Gallī et

terrentur et occiduntur.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Caedēs! Urbēs (with a sweeping gesture), oppida, collēs, silvae, portūs, agrī ab exercitū

Rōmānō occupābuntur. Imperium omnis Galliae ā Caesare obtinēbitur! Gladiīs (his voice

became harsh) rem gerēmus! Multī Gallī a nōbis occīdentur.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

2 en: behold

3 jam, adv.: already.

Page 118: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Reading No. 11 cont.

Frūmenta ab equitibus Rōmānīs incendentur; pontes et oppida ā legiōnibus incendentur.

Post bellum frūmentum et servī et arma ā Gallīs nōbīs trādentur. Ita pāx in Galliā

cōnfirmābitur. Victōria nostra erit! (He tossed up his head proudly.) Victōria! Ah!

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

PROFESSOR: Quid autem vōs nunc agitis?

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

CENTURIO: In proelium ā Caesare mittimur. Ecce nōs post aciem hostium sumus. Per

silvās longā viā vēnimus et . . . (Suddenly there was the high piercing note of a trumpet,

once—and again.) Signum est! Signum ā Caesare datur! (He threw up his arms.) In

hostēs!

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

The whole troop rushed madly off the scene towards the left. I shivered for the Gauls. The

cry of panic rose and mounted, shrill, of men in ultimate pain. Then the professor switched

off the power. We sat there long in silence.

Page 119: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

UNIT 6 (pg 225 - 266)

Lesson 22: THE PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE PURPOSE CLAUSES (p 225 - 234)

Introduction

We have studied the INDICATIVE MOOD. We saw that it was used in ordinary STATEMENTS OF FACT and in DIRECT QUESTIONS.

We shall now study the SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. This mood is used in many special constructions, both in main clauses and in subordinate clauses. Latin uses the subjunctive in sentences where the English uses auxiliary (or helping) verbs, such as may, might, should , and the like. But Latin also uses the subjunctive where English uses the indicative. The MEANING of the subjunctive, therefore, will have to be learned as we study the DIFFERENT LATIN CONSTRUCTIONS REQUIRING THE SUBJUNCTIVE.

1. THE PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE (p 225 – 226)

Assignment: Study the present tense of the subjunctive in the four conjugations, Grammar, Nos. 186, 194 – 196. Learn the meaning in purpose clauses. Note that (1) the vowels which begin the endings are not the usual ones in each conjugation, (2) the final personal signs are regular.

No. 186

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular laud-em (that) I may praise may I praise

Singular laud-ēs (that) you may praise may you praise

Singular laud-et (that) he, she, it may praise may he, she, it praise

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular laud-ēmus (that) we may praise may we praise

Singular laud-ētis (that) you may praise may you praise

Singular laud-ent (that) they may praise may they praise

Page 120: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

No. 194

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular mon-eam (that) I may advise may I advise

Singular mon-eās (that) you may advise may you advise

Singular mon-eat (that) he, she, it may advise may he, she, it advise

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular mon-eāmus (that) we may advise may we advise

Singular mon-eātis (that) you may advise may you advise

Singular mon-eant (that) they may advise may they advise

No. 195

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular mitt-am (that) I may send may I send

Singular mitt-ās (that) you may send may you send

Singular mitt-at (that) he, she, it may send may he, she, it send

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular mitt-āmus (that) we may send may we send

Singular mitt-ātis (that) you may send may you send

Singular mitt-ant (that) they may send may they send

Page 121: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

No. 196

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular aud-iam (that) I may hear may I hear

Singular aud-iās (that) you may hear may you hear

Singular aud-iat (that) he, she, it may hear may he, she, it hear

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular aud-iāmus (that) we may hear may we hear

Singular aud-iātis (that) you may hear may you hear

Singular aud-iant (that) they may hear may they hear

Exercises 238 – 241 (p225 – 226) – All assigned in Challenge B

Exercise 238 (pg 225)

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 collocet

2 det

3 perturbet

4 laudēs

5 pugnent

6 perturbēmus

7 occupent

8 perturbent

9 laudet

10 appellet

11 cōnfirmet

12 laudētis

Page 122: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 239 (pg 226)

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 moneās

2 terreant

3 sustineat

4 habeat

5 moneāmus

6 terreātis

7 teneat

8 moneātis

9 obtineant

Exercise 240 (pg 226)

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 mittāmus

2 dūcant

3 pellat

4 petant

5 dēfendat

6 cēdant

7 pōnātis

8 pellant

9 īnstruant

10 incendat

11 vincant

12 mittās

Page 123: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 241 (pg 226)

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 audiāmus

2 veniat

3 mūniant

4 audiās

5 conveniant

6 audiātis

7 veniant

8 mūniat

9 audiam

Page 124: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

2. MOOD IN PURPOSE CLAUES (p 226 - 227)

He is fighting in order that he may defend the city.Pugnat ut urbem d ēfendat .

“He is fighting” is a MAIN clause. “In order that” introduces a SUBORDINATE clause.

“In order that he may defend the city” is a SUBORDINATE clause. This subordinate clauses expresses the PURPOSE of his fighting. It answers the QUESTION: “For what purpose is he fighting?” ANSWER: “In order that he might defend the city.”

A subordinate clause expressing PURPOSE is called a PURPOSE CLAUSE.

RULE: A purpose clause is introduced by UT (“in order that”). The verb in the purpose clause is put in the SUBJUNCTIVE.

Page 125: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Vocabulary (pg 227)

vīta, ae - life

vallum, ī - wall, rampart

amīcitia, ae - friendship

fossa, ae - ditch

celeriter, adv. - swiftly

Related English Words (pg 227)

Vital; amicable; vitamin; celerity

Related Latin Word (pg 227) : Amīcus

LAUDĀBŌ DEUM MEUM IN VĪTĀ MEĀ. - From the Roman Breviary

Page 126: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 242 (pg 228)

1) Translate 2) Point out MAIN clauses (underline once)3) Point out SUBORDINATE PURPOSE clauses (circle it) 4) Diagram sentences 1 and 2

1. Castra vallō mūnit ut ea dēfendat.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Damusne praemia amīcīs ut amīcitiam cōnfirmēmus?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Fortiter pugnō ut vītam meam cōnservem.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Hīberna fossā mūniunt ut impetum hostium sustineant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Equitēs celeriter veniunt ut frūmenta incendant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 127: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 242 cont.

DIAGRAM1. Castra vallō mūnit ut ea dēfendat.

2. Damusne praemia amīcīs ut amīcitiam cōnfirmēmus?

Page 128: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

3. PRIMARY TENSES (pg 228 – 229)

The present, future, and future perfect in the INDICATIVE are called PRIMARY TENSES. When the verb of the main clause is in a PRIMARY TENSE, the PRESENT subjunctive must be used in a PURPOSE clause. In these sentences, pugnat, pugnābit, and pugnāverit are PRIMARY tenses. Therefore dēfendat is in the PRESENT subjunctive.

Pugnat ut urbem dēfendat. He is fighting in order that he may defend the city.

Pugnābit ut urbem dēfendat.He will fight in order that he may defend the city.

Pugnāverit ut urbem dēfendat.He will have fought in order that he may defend the city.

RULE: When the main verb is in a PRIMARY tense, use the PRESENT subjunctive in the purpose clause.

We can express purpose in English in DIFFERENT ways:

He fights in order that he may defend the city.

He fights that he may defend the city

He fights in order to defend the city.

He fights to defend the city.

All the MEAN the same thing and MAY be translated into Latin the same way:

Pugnāt ut urbem dēfendat.

Page 129: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercises 243 – 245 (p 228 – 229) – All Assigned in Challenge B

Exercise 243 (pg 228)

In which sentences should the present subjunctive be used?

1. Pugnāvit ut _____________________________

2. Pugnāverās ut _____________________________

3. Veniet ut __________________________________

4. Hostēs terret ut ______________________________

5. Praemium eīs dedit ut ___________________________

6. Pugnat ut ______________________________________

7. Veniō ut _______________________________________

8. Pugnāverit ut ___________________________________

Page 130: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 244 (pg 229)

1.Mīlitēs glōriae cupidī pugnant ut hostēs vincant. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

2.Pugnābuntne virī līberī semper ut cīvitātem nostram servent? _______________________

_________________________________________________________________________

3.Arma ā nōbīs parantur ut vītās nostrās cōnservēmus. ______________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

4.Castra vallō et fossā mūniunt ut impetum hostium sustineant. _______________________

_________________________________________________________________________

5.Amīcitiam cum omnibus gentibus cōnfirmābimus ut pācem cum eīs servēmus.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 131: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercise 245 (pg 229)

Translate:

1. They fight to defend the lives of good men. _____________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

2. He fortifies the hill with a rampart to hold it. _____________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

3. They are sending grain in order to strengthen peace. _____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

4. They help the Romans in order to strengthen friendship with them. __________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 132: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

4. NEGATIVE PURPOSE CLAUSES (pg 230 – 234)

He fights in order that the enemy may not burn the city.He fights lest the enemy burn the city.

Pugnat nē hostēs urbem incendant.

A purpose is expressed in the subordinate clause of these sentences, but the purpose is NEGATIVE (NOT, LEST).

RULE: When the purpose clause is negative, nē (“in order that.. not”, “lest”) is used instead of ut nōn.

Notice that the meaning of nē is in order that.. NOT. Therefore in the example the English not is translated in the word nē.

Assignment: Learn the present subjunctive of sum, Grammar, No. 352.

No. 352

Irregular Verbs – sum, esse, fuī , futūrus, intr. am, be

Subjunctive

Sing sim I may be

Sing sīs You may be

Sing sit He, she, it may be

Pl sīmus We may be

Pl sītis You may be

Pl sint they may be

Page 133: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Vocabulary (pg 230)

exspectō, 1. tr - wait for, wait

novus, a, um - new

diū, adv. - a long time, long

ācriter, adv. - bitterly, eagerly

expugnō, 1, tr. - storm, take by storm

Related English Words (pg 230)

Great expectations. The acrid smell of burning sulfur. I am expecting a friend. Not so many years ago the radio was a novelty.

Related Latin words (p 230)

Diū pugnāvimus. Oppidum oppugnāvit.

Page 134: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W6

Exercises 246 – 250, Reading No. 12 (p 231 – 234) – Assigned this week in Challenge B - #246

Exercise 246 (pg 231)

1. Frūmentum in castra ā servīs portātur nē inopia frūmentī sit. _______________________

_________________________________________________________________________

2. Continetne mīlitēs in castrīs ut cōpiās novās exspectet? __________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

3. In agrōs hostium vénit ut eōs terreat. _________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

4. Gallī diu et ācriter pugnant nē Rōmānī frūmenta incendant. ________________________

________________________________________________________________________

5. Virtūtem mīlitum ōrātiōne cōnfirmat ut victōriae cupidī sint. _________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

6. Praemia prīncipibus dat ut amīcitiam cum eōrum gentibus cōnfirmet. _________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

7. Gallī pugnant nē servī sint. _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

8. Centuriō frātrem adjuvat nē hostēs eum occīdant. _____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

9. Castra vallō et fossā mūnit nē hostēs ea expugnent. _____________________________

______________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 6

Page 135: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 7

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

7 Lesson 22-23

pg 231 - 240

187, 197-199 #247-258, Read No 13 235

Exercises 246 – 250, Reading No. 12 (p 231 – 234) – Assigned this week in Challenge B - #247 – 250

Exercise 247 (pg 231)Translate

1. They fight in order to conquer. _______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. They assault the town in order to take it by storm. ________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. They are coming to hear the speech. __________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. They are seizing the bridge to burn it. __________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. They will come to see Rome. ________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. They pray in order to be good. _______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. They will fortify the town lest the enemy take it by storm. ___________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. They warn the chief in order to preserve his life. __________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 136: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7Exercise 247 cont.

9. He fights in order to be king. _________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. They are yielding lest there be a slaughter. _____________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

11. They station soldiers to defend the bridge. ______________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

12. They are handing over arms to strengthen peace. ________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

13. They prepare arms to wage war. _____________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

14. He will come to kill the commander in chief. ____________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

15. He is coming to seek peace. _________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

16. He will remain to wait for new legions. _________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

Page 137: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 248 (pg 231)

Translate

1. God helps us in order that the enemy may not overcome us. ________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Mary prays for us that we may have the grace of God. _____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. I shall fight bravely and long to preserve your life. ________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. He is fortifying the camp with a ditch to defend it. _________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. We are waiting for Caesar lest the enemy conquer us. ____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Is he leading new legions into Gaul to take the cities (by storm)? ____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. He is burning the crops in order that there may be a scarcity of grain in Gaul.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. He is strengthening friendship with all tribes lest there be war. _______________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 138: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 248 cont.

9. They are coming to storm the town. ___________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. The enemy is pressing them hard. Therefore they will give way lest the enemy kill them1.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Them: translate here by sē

11. They are assembling to hear the king. ________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 139: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 249 (pg 232)

1. Identify and translate these forms; 2. Use each in a Latin sentence.

1. contendat:________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. vincam: _________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. timeant: _________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. expugnant: ______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. laudet: __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. vincet: __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. pugnat: _________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. pellat: __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. exspectābit: _____________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. veniat: _________________________________________________________________

Page 140: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

__________________________________________________________________________

S2W7

Exercise 249 cont. 11. veniet: _________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. vincit: __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. adjuvet: ________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. dēfendant: ______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

15. dūcat: _________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. cōnfirmat: _______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

17. appellēs: ______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

18. geris: __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

19. occupent: _______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

20. occīdant: _______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

21. adjuvant: _______________________________________________________________

Page 141: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

__________________________________________________________________________

S2W7

Note on translation:

Very often several meanings are given for a Latin word in the vocabularies. In translating you should choose the meaning that makes GOOD SENSE. For example, in the following sentences altus must be translated in different ways. Explain how you know which meaning to use.

1. Hannibal cōpiās trāns montēs altōs dūxit.

2. Hannibal cōpiās trāns flūmina alta dūxit.

Exercise 250 (pg 233)

Translate and explain the case of the italicized words.

1. Multī hominēs in Italiam veniunt ut Rōmam videant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Hominēs celeriter conveniunt ut rēs novās et audiant et videant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Mīlitēs diū et fortiter pugnant ut victōriae glōriam comparent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 142: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 250 cont. 4. Mīlitēs cum hostibus ācriter contendunt ut eōs pellant atque occīdant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Dominus malus ā servīs miserīs laudātur ut vītam eōrum servet.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Caesar, vir bonus et fortis, cum mīlitibus in aciē saepe pugnat ut eōrum virtūtem

cōnfirmet.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Castra vallō et fossā ā Rōmānīs mūniuntur nē hostēs ea expugnent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Ducēs mīlitibus saepe et grātiās agunt et praemia dant ut fortiter pugnent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 143: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

9. Suntne imperātōrēs saepe glōriae atque victōriae cupidī?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 144: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

LESSON 23: THE IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE (pg 235 – 245)

1. IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS (pg 235 – 237)

Assignment: Learn the imperfect subjunctive, Grammar, Nos. 187, 197 – 199

No. 187

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular laud-ārem (that) I might praise

Singular laud-ārēs (that) you might praise

Singular laud-āret (that) he, she, it might praise

Singular laud-ārēmus (that) we might praise

Singular laud-ārētis (that) you might praise

Singular laud-ārent (that) they might praise

No. 197

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular mon-ērem (that) I might advise

Singular mon-ērēs (that) you might advise

Singular mon-ēret (that) he, she, it might advise

Singular mon-ērēmus (that) we might advise

Singular mon-ērētis (that) you might advise

Singular mon-ērent (that) they might advise

Page 145: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

No. 198

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular mitt-erem (that) I might sendSingular mitt-erēs (that) you might sendSingular mitt-eret (that) he, she, it might send

Singular mitt-erēmus (that) we might sendSingular mitt-erētis (that) you might sendSingular mitt-erent (that) they might send

No. 199

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

Singular aud-īrem (that) I might hear

Singular aud-īrēs (that) you might hear

Singular aud-īret (that) he, she, it might hear

Singular aud-īrēmus (that) we might hear

Singular aud-īrētis (that) you might hear

Singular aud-īrent (that) they might hear

Note: Here is an easy way to remember the imperfect subjunctive: ADD THE REGULAR FINAL PERSONAL SIGNS (-m, etc) TO THE PRESENT INFINITIVE. For example:

1. laudāre + -m = laudārem2. laudāre + -s = laudārēs, etc.

Page 146: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Vocabulary (pg 235)

tribūnus, ī - tribune

cōnsilium, ī - plan, counsel

concilium, ī - council

lēgātus, ī - envoy, lieutenant

lātus, a, um - wide

facile, adv. - easily

Note: Tribūnus is often used with the genitive mīlitum. Tribūnus mīlitum (literally, a tribune of soldiers) is to be translated a military tribune. The military tribune was an officer a rank above the centurion.

Related English Words (pg 235 - 236)

The American Legation. The latitude and the longitude of the earth. The papal legate. His manner was facile. Control of the air facilitates military victories. Practice can produce remarkable facility.

Related Latin Word (p 236): Iter per prōvinciam facile erat.

Page 147: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercises 251 – 255 (pg 236 – 237) – All assigned in Challenge B

Exercise 251 (pg 236)

[First Conjugation]

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 exspectāret

2 parāret

3 appellārent

4 oppugnārent

5 ōrāret

6 laudārem

7 pugnārent

8 laudārēmus

9 portāret

10 superārent

11 exspectārent

12 laudārētis

Page 148: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 252 (pg 236) [Second Conjugation]

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 habēret

2 obtinērent

3 monērētis

4 terrēremt

5 monērēmus

6 movēret

7 sustinērent

8 tenēret

9 monērem

10 vidērem

11 terrēret

12 complērent

Exercise 253 (pg 236) [Third Conjugation]

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 peterent

2 gereret

3 mitterem

4 premeret

5 mitterēmus

6 mitterēs

7 trāderent

8 cēderent

9 gererent

10 incenderet

11 īnstruerent

12 contenderet

Page 149: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 254 (pg 236) [Fourth Conjugation]

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 audīrēmus

2 venīret

3 mūnīret

4 audīrētis

5 mūnīrent

6 convenīrent

7 audīrem

8 audīrēs

9 convenīrētis

10 venīrent

11 audīrent

12 convenīret

Page 150: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 255 (pg 237) [General]

Latin Verb What form are these? Mood, Tense, Voice, Person, Number1 vincit

2 expugnet

3 pelleret

4 veniet

5 exspectēmus

6 sint

7 audīret

8 contenderent

9 veniam

10 oppugnat

11 vidēret

12 portārent

13 sītis

14 audiat

15 portet

Page 151: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

2. SECONDARY TENSES (pg 237 – 241)

The imperfect, perfect, and pluperfect indicative are SECONDARY TENSES.

When the main verb is in a SECONDARY tense, use the IMPERFECT subjunctive in the purpose clause.

Pugnāvit ut castra occupāret.He fought in order that he might seize the camp.He fouhgt that he might seize the camp.He fought in order to seize the camp.He fought to seize the camp.

Rule: Purpose clauses are introduced by ut (Negative: Nē); Use the subjunctive; Use the present subjunctive when the main verb is primary; Use the imperfect subjunctive when the main verb is secondary.

Pugnābat ut castra occupāret.He was fighting in order that he might seize the camp.

Pugnāverat ut castra occupāret.He had fought in order that he might seize the camp.

Page 152: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercises 256 – 259, Reading No 13 (pg 238 – 241) – Assigned in Challenge B - #256 – 258, Reading #13

Exercise 256 (page 238)

1. Translate 2. Parse the italicized words 3. Diagram Sentence #1

1. Caesar legiōnēs novās et integrās saepe exspectāvit ut hostēs facile vinceret.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Gallī oppidum vallō altō et fossā lātā mūnīvērunt nē Rōmānī id expugnārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Lēgātus centuriōnēs et tribūnōs mīlitum appellāvit ut fortiter et diū pugnārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Dūxitne Hannibal omnēs cōpiās trāns lāta flūmina et per montēs altōs ut cum Rōmānīs in

Italiā bellum gereret?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 153: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 256 cont. 5. Jēsūs Chrīstus, Deī Fīlius, in mundum vēnit ut vītam et salūtem nōbīs daret.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Gallī saepe lēgātōs in castra Caesaris mīsērunt ut pācem et amīcitiam peterent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Concilium saepe ab imperātōribus vocātur ut dē rē gravī in conciliō agant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Dux lēgātīs praemia dedit ut cōnsilium laudārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 154: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 257 (pg 238)

Translate:

1. They fought in order to conquer. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. They assaulted the town in order to take it (by storm). _____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. They seized the bridge to burn it. ____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. They came to hear the plan. _________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. They came to see Rome. ___________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. They prayed in order to be good. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. They fortify the town lest the enemy storm it. ____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. They warned the chief in order to spare his life. __________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. He waged war in order to seize the royal power. _________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. They are yielding lest there be a slaughter. ____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. They stationed horsemen to defend the hill. ____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. They handed over the arms in order to preserve peace. __________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 155: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 257 cont.

13. They prepared arms in order to wage war. _____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. The chiefs were dismissed lest the tribes wage war. _____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

15. He came to kill the king. ___________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. The soldiers were drawn up to defend the city. _________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

17. He waited for Caesar in order to conquer the enemy. ____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

18. He came to seek peace. ___________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

19. They assembled to hear the speech. _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

20. He remained to wait for the chief. ____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 156: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Exercise 258 (pg 239)

Translate

1. The Romans fortified the camp with a wide ditch lest the enemy should easily take it (by storm).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Caesar, in the council, often strengthened the courage of the lieutenants and military tribunes in order that they might fight bravely.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. They fought bitterly lest the enemy storm the town.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. After a war were the chiefs and leaders of the enemy often killed by Caesar?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. The lieutenant held the soldiers in the camp lest the enemy should see the plans.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Caesar stationed soldiers on the bridge lest the enemy should come across the wide river.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 157: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Reading No. #13

Dē Frātrum Fortium Morte – A story based on the report of the affair made by Caesar

In hōc1 proeliō multī equitēs occīsī sunt; in2 eīs vir fortis et nōbilis, Pīsō Aquiīānus.

Is amīcus erat Populī Rōmānī.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Ejus frāter in proeliō vulnerātus3 erat et ab hostibus premēbātur. Nōn erat spēs salūtis. Pīsō

id vīdit; vīdit frātrem; vidit hostēs.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Tamen in hostēs contendit ut frātrem adjuvāret. Ab hostibus autem circumventus4 est atque

occīsus est. _______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1. hoc: this 2. in - here means among 3. vulnero,1, tr - wound 4. circumvenio: surround

Page 158: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Reading #13 cont

Tum frāter Pīsōnis morte ējus vehementer mōtus est et in hostēs contendit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Acriter pugnāvit; tamen is etiam ab hostibus occīsus est. Ita occīsī sunt frātēs fortēs et bonī.

Laudāmusne eōs?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Answer in complete Latin sentences

1. Quis fuit Pīsō Aquītānus?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Quis ab hostibus premēbātur?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 159: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W7

Reading #13 cont

3. Quis in hostēs contendit?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4 Cur in hostēs sē mīsit?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Estne Pīsō Aquitānus occīsus?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Estne frāter ējus occīsus?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 7

Page 160: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 8

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

8 Lesson 23 - 24

pg 241 - 252

845-848, 353, 139, 479 #260-261, #263-265,

Read No. 14

241, 248

3. ADJECTIVES USED AS NOUNS: IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE OF SUM (p 241 – 245)

Assignment: Study the use of adjectives as nouns (Grammar, Nos 845 – 848) and the imperfect subjunctive of sum, (Grammar No. 353).

No. 845

a. in the masculine plural

Nostrī fortiter pugnābant.

Our men were fighting bravely.

Fortūna fortēs adjuvat.

Fortune helps the brave.

No. 846

b. in the neuter nominative and accusative plural.

Vēra dīcit.

He speaks the truth. (lit. : true things).

2. Less frequent:

No. 847

a. In the masculine singular and only to stand for a class.

Sapiēns omnia sua sēcum portat.

The wise man carries all his possessions with him.

No. 848

b. in the neuter singular, generally of adjectives of the first and second declensions only.

Vērum dīcit.

He speaks the truth.

Parvō contentus est.

He is content with little.

Page 161: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

No. 353

Irregular Verbs – sum, esse, fuī , futūrus, intr. am, be

Subjunctive Imperfect

Singular 1, essem I might be

Singular 2. essēs You might be

Singular 3. esset He, she, it might be

Plural 1. essēmus We might be

Plural 2. essētis You might be

Plural 3. essent they might be

Vocabulary (pg 241)

labor, labōris - effort, toil

ōrdō, ōrdinis, m. - rank (of soldiers)

obses, obsidis, c. - hostage

inter, prep. w. acc. - between, among

statim, adv. - at once, immediately

Note: Obses is marked c (=common gender); that is, it may be either masculine or feminine, as hostages were men and women. However, use it as masculine unless it clearly refers to women.

Related English Words (pg 241)

Line the men up in order. Hard labor. Interstate commerce.

Review Vocabulary (pg 241)sum, esse, fuī, futūrus, intr. - am

sum, esse, afuī, afutūrus, intr., ab (ā) w. abl - am away, am distant

ab (ā), prep w. abl – from (w. absum); by (agency)

Page 162: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

IDIOM STUDY

Inter is a preposition which governs the accusative. It means between or among. Study its idiomatic use with REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS and dō.

Obsidēs inter nōs damus. (Literally, We are giving hostages among ourselves.)We are exchanging hostages.

Obsidēs inter vōs datis.(Literally, You are giving hostages among yourselves.)You are exchanging hostages.

Gentēs Galliae obsidēs inter sē dant.(Literally, The tribes of Gaul are giving hostages among themselves.)The tribes of Gaul are exchanging hostages.

Therefore, dō, dare, dedī, datus, 1, tr., with inter and the proper REFLEXIVE pronoun means exchange.

Propter tē omnia agō et sustineō. From the Following of Christ.

Page 163: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercises 260 – 262, Reading No 14 (pg 242 – 244) – Assigned in Challenge B - #260, 261, Reading #14

Exercise 260 (page 242)

1. Translate 2. Explain the use of the italicized words.

1. Laudāturne Deus ab omnibus sānctīs?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Gallī saepe obsidēs inter sē dedērunt ut pācem cōnfirmārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Fortēs propter metum nōn cēdunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Caesar, vir fortis, omnia fortiter ēgit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 164: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 260 cont.

5. Caesar multa bella gessit ut imperātor et prīnceps esset.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Adjuvatne Deus fortēs?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Nostrī fortiter et ācriter semper pugnant ut līberam cīvitātem nostram cōnservent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Fortēs fortūna aduvat. (a Roman proverb)

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Nostrī cessērunt nē magna caedēs esset.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Omnia virtūte agō ut bonus servus Chrīstī sim.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 165: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 260 cont.

11. Lēgātus in agrōs statim contendit nē longē ā proeliō abesset.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Sānctī labōrēs gravēs propter Chrīstum sustinent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Hostēs equitēs in aciem statim mīsērunt ut ordīnēs nostrōrum perturbārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. Prīncipēs obsidēs inter sē dabant ut pāx in Galliā esset.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

15. Prīncipēs Galliae semper inter sē dē imperiō omnis Galliae contendēbant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. Erat iter et difficile et angustum inter montēs et flūmen.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

17. Ducēs inter sē in conciliō dē rē gravī agunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 166: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 261 (pg 243)

Translate:

1. Meanwhile cavalry were sent by the general into the territory of the enemy to find out their

plans.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. The Romans often fortified the camp with a wall lest the Gauls take it (by storm).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. The Gauls strengthened peace by means of hostages.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Cavalry were immediately sent against the enemy in order to disturb their ranks.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. They often exchanged hostages that they might preserve peace and friendship.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. A council assembled in the town at once in order that the chiefs might treat among

themselves about peace and war.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 167: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Reading No. 14 (pg 244)

Dē Obsidibus

Gallī obsidēs inter sē saepe dedērunt ut amīcitiam et pācem cōnfirmārent. Itaque per

obsidēs amīcitia cōnfirmāta est atque ita pāx in Galliā est cōnfirmāta.

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

Gallī saepe obsidēs etiam Rōmānīs dedērunt ut fidem confirmarent. Rōmānī autem obsidēs

Gallīs nōn dedērunt, nam omnis Galliae imperiī cupidī, gentēs Galliae armīs et virtūte vīcerant.

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

Itaque Gallī Rōmānos timēbant et cum eīs bella saepe gessērunt nē obsidēs eīs darent.

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

Page 168: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Reading No. 14 cont... Obsidēs autem puerī et virī et mātrēs et patrēs erant. Saepe etiam erant fīliī principum et

rēgum Gallōrum. Liberī autem nōn erant obsidēs.

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

Eōs enim Rōmānī in castrīs et hībernīs et oppidīs tenēbant ut propter eōrum salūtem Gallī

pācem servārent. Itaque obsidēs saepe miserī erant.

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

Nam, si1 post pācem Gallī bellum cum Rōmānīs gessērunt, Rōmānī omnēs eōrum obsidēs

occidēbant ut posteā2 Gallī propter metum fidem servārent.

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

1. si: if2. postes, adv: afterwards

Page 169: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Reading No. 14 cont... Ita Gallī caede obsidum saepe territī sunt et bellum cum Rōmānīs saepe nōn gessērunt ut

obsidum vītās cōnservārent.

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

Answer in complete Latin sentences: 1. Cūr Gallī inter sē obsidēs dedērunt?

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ 2. Cūr Gallī Romānīs obsidēs dabant?

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________ 3. Erantne obsidēs liberī?

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

4. Ubi tenēbantur obsidēs ā Rōmānīs?

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

5. Erantne obsidēs saepe miserī? Cūr?

__________________________________________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

Page 170: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

LESSON 24: THE RELATIVE CLAUSES; THE USE OF AD (pg 246 – 266)

1. Quī, Quae, Quod (pg 246 – 252)

The RELATIVE PRONOUN in English is:1. WHO (whose, whom) for PERSONS;2. WHICH for THINGS3. THAT for PERSONS or THINGS

The RELATIVE PRONOUN introduces a SUBORDINATE ADJECTIVE CLAUSE.

The Gaul – who was in the camp – was a slave.Those – who fight bravely – do not always win.

The MAIN clauses are:The Gaul was a slave.Those do not always win.

The SUBORDINATE clauses are:who was in the campwho fight bravely

These subordinate clauses are ADJECTIVE clauses because, like an adjective, they modify (describe) a noun (the Gaul) or a pronoun (those).

Page 171: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8In English the relative pronoun:

1. May be EXPRESSED:1. The Gaul – who was in the camp – was a slave.2. The column – which was in the forest – was long.3. The column – that was in the forest – was long.

2. May be IMPLIED4. The Gaul – I saw - was a slave. Note: Whom is understood after Gaul. The full sentence would read: The Gaul – whom I saw – was a slave.

In Latin the relative pronoun, quī, quae, quod – is always EXPRESSED.

1. Gallus - quī in castrīs erat – servus erat.2. Agmen – quod in silvīs erat – longum erat.3. Agmen – quod in silvīs erat – longum erat.4. Gallus – quem vīdī – servus erat.

Note: Quem is masculine singular because it must AGREE with its antecedent, Gallus, in GENDER and NUMBER. But quem is in the ACCUSATIVE case because it is the object of vīdī, the verb in its own clause.

Rule: The General Rule for the agreement of pronouns (Grammar Nos 479) applies to relative pronouns also.

The ANTECEDENT of a relative pronoun (i.e. the word to which the pronoun refers) is sometimes UNDERSTOOD in Latin when it would be in the nominative case. Express the antecedent when translating into English.

Quī fortiter pugnant, bellī glōriam habent.THOSE who fight bravely have the glory of war.

Page 172: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Assignment: Learn the declension of quī, quae, quod (Grammar, No 139) and the rule for the agreement of pronouns (Grammar, No 479).

No. 139

The Relative Pronoun and AdjectiveWHO, WHICH, THAT, WHAT

Masc Fem Neut

Singular Nom quī quae quod

Singular Gen cūjus cūjus cūjus

Singular Dat cui cui cui

Singular Acc quem quam quod

Singular Abl quō quā quō

Masc Fem Neut

Plural Nom quī quae quae

Plural Gen quōrum quārum quōrum

Plural Dat quibus quibus quibus

Plural Acc quōs quās quae

Plural Abl quibus quibus quibus

Note: In the ablative, Quōcum (or quīcum), Quōcum, quibuscum are used instead of cum quō,cum quā and cum quibus.

Page 173: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

No. 479

A pronoun agrees with the word to which it refers in gender and number; its case depends on its use in it own clause.

↓ --------------------------------------↓

Rōma est magna urbs. Vīdistīne eam?

Rome is a large city. Have you seen it?

↓ ---------------------------↓

Contrā Germānōs exercitum dūxit. Hī sunt fortēs.

He led his army against the Germans, These are brave.

↓ --------↓

Marīa quam laudāmus Māter Deī est.

Mary, whom we praise, is the Mother of God.

S2W8

Vocabulary (pg 248)

quī, quae, quod - who (whose, whom); which; that

auxilium, ī - help, aid

auxilia, auxiliōrum – reinforcement

memoria, ae - memory

memoriā teneō, tenēre, tenuī, tentus, 2. tr. - keep in memory, remember

Related English words (pg 248)

The pilot turned on the auxiliary motor. They held a memorial service.

Page 174: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 263 – 266, Reading No 15 (pg 248 – 252) – Assigned in Ch B - #263 – 265

Exercise 263 (page 248)

Supply the correct form of the relative pronoun:

1. Caesar, who was a great general, conquered the Gauls.

Caesar, ____________ imperātor magnus fuit, Gallōs vīcit.

2. The Gauls, whose leaders Caesar killed, were not friends of the Romans.

Gallī, _______________ ducēs Caesar occīdit, amīcī Rōmānōrum nōn fuērunt.

3. Caesar, whose victories we all praise, was a great general.

Caesar, _____________ victōriās omnēs laudāmus, imperātor magnus fuit.

4. God, to whom we give thanks, is our Father.

Deus, ______________ grātiās agimus, Pater noster est.

5. The soldiers to whom Caesar gave rewards were brave.

Mīlitēs _____________ Caesar praemia dedit fortēs erant.

6. Caesar, whom the Romans praised, was a great general.

Caesar, ___________ Rōmānī laudāvērunt, imperātor magnus fuit.

7. The Gauls, whom Caesar conquered, fought bravely.

Gallī, _____________ Caesar vīcit, fortiter pugnāvērunt.

8. The Gauls with whom Caesar fought were brave.

Gallī _____________ -cum Caesar pugnāvit, fortēs erant.

9. The war, about which the Senate sent letters into Gaul, was long and difficult.

Bellum dē ____________ senātus litterās in Galliam mīsit longum et difficile fuit.

Page 175: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 263 cont.

10 .The town that Caesar stormed was large.

Oppidum _____________ Caesar oppugnāvit magnum fuit.

11. The army with which Caesar came into Gaul was large.

Exercitus _____________-cum Caesar in Galliam vēnit magnus erat.

12. The victory for which Caesar was eager was not easy.

Victōria ____________ Caesar cupidus erat facilis nōn erat.

13. The Gauls burned the baggage that was in the camp.

Gallī impedīmenta _____________ in castrīs erant incendērunt.

Page 176: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 264 (page 249)

1. Translate; 2. Explain the case & agreement of the italicized relative pronouns 3. Diagram Sentences 1 & 2

1. Rōmānī Chrīstum, quī erat Fīlius Deī, occīdērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Marīa, quam laudāmus, Māter Deī est.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Gentēs quae prōvinciae fīnitimae erant lēgātōs mīsērunt ut auxilium peterent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Legiō quae trāns flūmen fuerat in silvās statim missa est ut hostēs pelleret.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 177: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 264 cont.

5. Bella quae patrēs nostrī gessērunt memoriā semper tenēbimus.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Oppidum in quō frūmentum erat ā Rōmānīs oppugnābātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Imperātōrēs quōrum memoriam laudāmus fortēs erant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Lēgātus obsidēs quōs in castrīs tenēbat occīdit ut Gallōs terrēret.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Ego, quī Rōmānus sum, tibi nōn cēdam.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Caesar auxilia in silvās statim mīsit nē hostēs nostrōs vincerent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Lēgātus servum cui hostēs gladium dederant occīdit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 178: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 264 cont.

12. Hīberna in quibus Rōmānī sunt angusta sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Dabisne nōbīs, quī Gallī sumus, frūmentum?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. Rēgem prō quō pugnāvī omnēs hominēs memoriā tenēbunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

15. Rōmānī eōs quibuscum pugnāverant saepe occīdēbant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. Caesar, quōcum eram, mihi praemia dedit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

17. Quī lēgem Chrīstī servant, sānctī sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 179: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 264 cont.

18. Gentēs in quārum fīnēs Caesar vēnit fortiter cum eō pugnāvērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

19. Legiōnēs quās trāns flūmen lātum prīmā lūce vīderam ā Caesare in castra ductae sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

20. Caesar imperium cūjus cupidus erat obtinuit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 180: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 265 (page 250)

1. Translate;

2. Explain the agreement and the case of all relative pronouns in the Latin translation.

1. The Romans always killed slaves who had helped the enemy.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. The mountains of Gaul, across which Caesar often led the Roman forces, were high.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Caesar often killed the leaders of the tribes with which he fought.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Caesar led the troops across many rivers, which were long and deep.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 181: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 265 cont.

5. Christ, who ís the Son of God, was killed by the Romans.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. The legion, which was in the forest, was fighting bravely.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. The legion, to which the Gauls gave grain, was led into winter quarters.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. The legion, the centurions of which were brave, conquered the enemy.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. The legions, which Caesar led into the province, were brave.

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 182: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 265 cont.

10. The legion, with which the Gauls fought, was brave.__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. The soldiers, whose courage Caesar praised, are in winter quarters.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. The soldiers, to whom the general gave thanks, had withstood many attack of the enemy.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. The Gauls often bravely defended the towns which the Romans stormed.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. The territory of the enemy, into which Caesar led all the Roman forces, was full of

dangers.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 183: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 265 cont.

15. The affair, concerning which Caesar was treating with the Gauls, was serious.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. The forest, through which Caesar often led the Roman legions, was full of dangers.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

17. The Roman people, on whose behalf Caesar fought, was great and renowned.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

18. Caesar seized many cities, from which Rome was far distant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

19. The roads, which were constructed by the Romans, were long and safe.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 184: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 265 cont.

20. The things, on account of which peoples and tribes wage war, are serious.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

21. Caesar immediately gave the soldiers the grain which the slaves had carried into the

camp.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

22. Caesar conquered the soldiers with whom the enemy had filled the bridge.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

23. I, who am a Christian, will always praise Christ and Mary.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

24. We all praise Caesar, whose victories were many and great.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 185: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes
Page 186: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W8

Exercise 265 cont.

25. The Gauls were storming the camp which had been pitched in their territory.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

26. Caesar held the power for which he had been eager.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

27. To you who are enemies of the Roman name I shall give neither grain nor arms.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

28. We soldiers who fight for Rome are eager for victory and fame.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

29. The hill on which the Romans pitched the camp is high.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 8

Page 187: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 9

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

9 Lesson 24

pg 253 - 265

546 #267-270, #272-273, #275-276

Read No 16

254, 259, 263

2. The use of AD (pg 253 – 257)

We have studied a number of prepositions, some governing the ablative case, others the accusative. The preposition in, for example, used with the accusative case after verbs of motion, means into, in, onto, upon.

In flūmen pulsī sunt. They were driven into the river.

In castra contendit. He hastened into the camp.

Another preposition which takes the ACCUSATIVE is ad. This word has several meanings and uses.

1. Ad is used with verbs of motion (and occasionally others like pertineō) to mean to or up to.Ad flūmen pulsī sunt. They were driven to the river.Ad castra contendit. He hastened (up) to the camp.Ea omnia ad bellum pertinent. All those things pertain to war.

2. Ad is used in expressions of time to mean to, until.Ad noctem pugnāverunt. They fought until night.

3. Ad sometimes means at, both with verbs of motion and with other verbs.Ad flūmen pervēnērunt. They arrived at the river.Ad flūmen castra posuērunt. They pitched camp at the river.

4. Ad is used with certain adjectives to mean for. Ad omnia parātus. Prepared for all things.Ad bellum ūtilia. Things useful for war.

5. Ad is sometimes strengthened by the adverb usque, all the way. Usque can be frequently left untranslated.

Usque ad urbem contendērunt.They hastened to (all the way to) the city.

Page 188: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Vocabulary (pg 254)

ad, prep. w. acc. - to, until, at, for (with adjectives)

usque, adv - all the way

perveniō, pervenīre, pervēnī, perventum, 4, intr.; or ad w. acc - arrive

pertineō, pertinēre, pertinuī, 2, intr.; ad w. Acc. - pertain to, stretch to

parātus, a, um; w. ad - prepared (for))

ūtilis, e; w. ad - useful (for)

nox, noctis – night

Related English Words (pg 254)

A pertinent remark. No one doubts the utility of water power. China has never been able to utilize all its resources. The bat is a nocturnal animal. Usque is a Latin adverb.

Related Latin words (pg 254)

Veniō; teneō; parō.

Review Vocabulary (pg 254)

in, prep. w. abl – in, on

in, prep. w. acc. – in, into, against, upong, onto, on

portō, 1, tr. - carry

moveō, movēre, mōvī, mōtus, 2. tr. - move

contendō, contendere, contendī, 3, tr. - strive, contend, hasten

Page 189: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

IDIOM STUDY

A verb is used impersonally when it has no DEFINITE SUBJECT. In English we use the indefinite IT as a subject for impersonal verbs.

It rains. In this sentence it does not refer to any definite thing.

In Latin many verbs are used impersonally in varioys constructions. When a verb is used impersonally, it is always in the THIRD PERSON SINGULAR and in, compound tenses, the participle is always NEUTER SINGULAR. For the present learn only these two common expressions:

Acriter pugnātum est.(Literally, It was fought bitterly.)There was bitter fighting. (or) They fought bitterly.

Ad flūmen perventum est.(Literally, It was arrived at the river)They arrived at the river.

Always translate Latin impersonal verbs into GOOD ENGLISH. The Romans used many verbs impersonally which we cannot so use in English.

Page 190: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercises 267 – 271 (pg 255 - 257) – Assigned in Challenge B - #267 – 270

Exercise 267 (page 255)[Drill on the use of ad and in]

1. Translate; 2. Explain the meaning of the prepositons:

1. In fīnēs hostium pervēnērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Ad flūmen pervēnērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Ad flūmen pugnāvērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Usque ad noctem pugnāvērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Arma ad bellum ūtilia sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Prīmā lūce ad castra perventum est.

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Prīmā lūce in castra pervēnit.

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Erat inopia omnium rērum in hībernīs nostrīs.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Ad impedīmenta ācriter pugnātum est

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 191: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 267 cont.

10. Mīlitēs ad omnia parātī erant.

__________________________________________________________________________

11. In locum tūtum castra mōvit.

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Frūmentum in castra portābātur.

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Dūxitne mīlitēs in urbem?

__________________________________________________________________________

14. Dūxitne mīlitēs usque ad urbem?

__________________________________________________________________________

15. Mīlitēs Rōmānī, ad mortem parātī, prō portīs īnstrūctī sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. In silvās contendēbat.

__________________________________________________________________________

17. Ad silvās contendēbat.

__________________________________________________________________________

18. Eōs in prōvinciam mīsit.

__________________________________________________________________________

19. Eōs ad prōvinciam mīsit.

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 192: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 267 cont.

20. In loca aliēna mīlitēs dūxit.

__________________________________________________________________________

21. In hīberna lēgātum mīsit.

__________________________________________________________________________

22. Ad Caesarem lēgātōs mīsērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

23. Mīles in pontem missus est.

__________________________________________________________________________

24. Mīles ad pontem missus est.

__________________________________________________________________________

25. Caesar undique prīncipēs ad sē vocāvit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

26. Ad flūmen perventum est.

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 193: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 268 (pg 256)

Translate

1. Ad impedīmenta ācriter usque ad noctem pugnātum est.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Lēgātī in castra celeriter pervēnērunt ut auxilium peterent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Mittēsne litterās et lēgātōs ad mē?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Chrīstiānī propter Chrīstum ad labōrem et mortem parātī sunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Omnia quae ad bellum pertinent ab hostibus nostrīs comparantur; itaque nōs etiam ea

quae ad bellum ūtilia sunt comparābimus.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Hostēs, glōriae cupidī, usque ad castra nostra vēnērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 194: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 268 cont.

7. Ducēs dē omnibus rēbus quae ad mīlitum salūtem pertinent in cōnsiliō inter sē agunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Mīlitēs ad labōrem praemiīs facile incitantur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Prīmā lūce ad fīnēs hostium perventum est.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Ibi flūmen lātum erat, sed pōns pertinuit ad urbem quam lēgātus tenēbat.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Imperātor omnēs lēgātōs et mīlitēs ad sē statim vocāvit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Tribūnōs mīlitum ad omnēs cīvitātēs fīnitimās dīmīsit ut praemiīs et ōrātiōnibus amīcitiam

cum eīs cōnfirmārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 195: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 269 (page 256)Translate

1. They arrived at a river which was wide and deep.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. There was bitter fighting at the river. (use the Latin idiomatic expression)

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. They hastened to Caesar to help him.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Did the Romans fight until night?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Are the soldiers prepared for battle?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Swords and arms are useful for war.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. They prepared everything which pertained to the journey.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 196: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 269 cont.

8. They stationed soldiers on the bridge which stretched to Rome.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. They hastened to the river to defend the bridge.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. The fresh legions were sent against the Gauls by the lieutenant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. They hastened to the hill and fortified it with a rampart and a ditch lest the enemy seize it.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 197: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Page 257 - Warning: Do not confuse ad and the dative of the indirect object. Ad, to, is used with verbs of motion. The indirect object is rarely used with verbs of motion.

He came to us. Ad nōs vēnit.He gave rewards to us. Nōbīs praemia dedit.

Exercise 270 (page 257)

Translate:

1. They handed over the arms to the Romans.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. They hastened to the Romans.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. They gave hostages to the Romans.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. They carried grain to the army.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. He called the lieutenants to him.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. He sent envoys to all the neighboring tribes

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

SEMPER PARATUS (Motto of the United States Coast Guard.

Page 198: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

3. RELATIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE (pg 258 – 262)

A RELATIVE CLAUSE is very frequently used in Latin instead of an ut-clause to EXPRESS PURPOSE. The rules for MOOD and TENSE are the same in relative clauses of purpose as in ut-clauses of purpose.

Equitēs mīsit quī cōnsilia cognōscerent.He sent calvary - who should learn the plans.

– in order that they might learn the plans.– In order to learn the plans.– That they might learn the plans– to learn the plans.

A relative clause of purpose should be used instead of an ut-clause whenever possible. It may be used whenever the relative pronoun can, WITHOUT CHANGING THE MEANING, be made to agree with a noun or pronoun in the main clause, thus:

1. He sent envoys to seek peace.

Before translating into English, change to:2. He sent envoys WHO should seek peace.

Lēgātōs mīsit QUI pācem PETERENT.

Sentences 1 and 2 MEAN THE SAME THING, but Sentence 2 shows how the sentence should be translated into Latin.

EXCEPTION: A relative clause of purpose can not be used when the relative pronoun would have to agree with the SUBJECT of an ACTIVE MAIN VERB.

He came to see Rome. Vēnit ut Rōmam vidēret.

This can not be changed to: He came who should see Rome.

A relative clause may be used to express purpose.Mood: SUBJUNCTIVETense: Same as in ut-clauses of purpose.

Page 199: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9 Vocabulary (pg 259)

dēdūcō, dēdūcere, dēdūxī, dēductus, 3, tr - lead, lead away

cognōscō, cognōscere, cognōvī, cognitus, 3. tr. - learn, find out

nuntius, ī - messenger, message

nātūra, ae - nature

-que, conj. - and

injūria, ae – injustice, wrong

Note: The conjugation -que is always added to the first word that follows the and.

Marīa sānctīque Deī. Mary and the Saints of God.

Senātus Populusque Rōmānus. The Roman Senate and People.

If et were used these would be:Marīa et sānctī Deī.; Senātus et Populus Rōmānus.

You have now learned three words for and:

1. et, which is the ordinatry conjugation in Latin;2. atque, which is more emphatic and emphasizes the second part of the combination.3. -que, which joins things that are more closely associated.

Related English Words (pg 259)

The injured party brought suit. Sherlock Holmes solved crimes by deduction. A papal nuncio.

Related Latin word (pg 259): Dūcō

Page 200: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercises 272 – 274, Reading No. 16 (pg 260 – 261)- Assigned in Challenge B – 272, 273, Reading #16

Exercise 272 (page 260)

1. Translate;

2. Diagram Sentences 1 & 2

1. Hostēs servum in castra Caesaris mīsērunt quī cōnsilia ējus cognōsceret.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Dux mīlitēs ad omnia parātōs in aciem dēdūxit quī hostium cōpiās sustinērent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Nuntium ad tē mittam quī dē injūriīs tēcum agat.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Dux mīlitēs ad collem statim mīsit quī eum vallō fossāque mūnīrent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Mīsitne rēx ad Caesarem nuntium quī auxilium peteret?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Equitēs ad flūmen mīsit quī locī nātūram cognōscerent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 201: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 272 cont.

7. Propter injūriās lēgātum mīsit quī obsidēs occīderet.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Diagram

1. Hostēs servum in castra Caesaris mīsērunt quī cōnsilia ējus cognōsceret.

2. Dux mīlitēs ad omnia parātōs in aciem dēdūxit quī hostium cōpiās sustinērent.

Page 202: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 273 (page 260)

Translate: (Use a relative clause of purpose whenever possible.)

1. They immediately sent envoys into the camp of Caesar to seek peace.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

2. A messenger was sent to Caesar to beg help.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

3. In front of the gate he stationed soldiers who were prepared for everything.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

4. Soldiers were stationed on the bridge to defend it.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

5. The chief came to seek grain.

______________________________________________________________________

6. He fortified the camp with a rampart lest the enemy storm it.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

7. He sent a lieutenant into Italy to lead away the new legions into Gaul.

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

Page 203: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Reading 16 (page 261-262):

HOW A HOSTILE KING HONORED THE HEROIC PATRIOTISM OF MUCIUS SCAEVOLA

Porsenna1 rēgnum Etruscōrum2 obtinēbat. Is erat vir fortis et imperiī atque glōriae

cupidus. Itaque cum Rōmānīs dē imperiō Italiae contendit et Rōmam magnīs cōpiīs

oppugnābat. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1 Porsenna, ae: Porsenna (a proper name)2 Etruscī, Etruscōrum: the Etruscans (a people who dwelt north of Rome)

Rōmānī autem cōpiam frūmentī nōn habēbant et vehementer terrēbantur. Erat autem in

numerō Rōmānōrum vir fortis, Mūcius Scaevola.3 __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3 Mucius, (ī) Scaevola (ae): Mucius Scaevola

Ab eō virtūs Rōmānōrum cōnfirmabatur. Eīs enim, “In castra Etruscōrum,”2 inquit,4

“contendam et Porsennam1 rēgem occīdam. Ita Rōmam servābō.”__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2 Etruscī, Etruscōrum: the Etruscans (a people who dwelt north of Rome)4 inquit: he said. Inquit, as here, is always put after the first words of a direct quotation.

Page 204: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Reading No. 16 cont.

Itaque in eōrum castra tūtus pervēnit. (However, he had never seen the King, and so

by mistake he killed one of the court officials instead of Porsenna.) Itaque Etruscī eum ad

rēgem dūxērunt. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Porsenna1 autem perīculō vehementer mōtus est. Itaque Mūciō,3 “Ad mē vēnistī,” inquit,4 “ut

mē occīderēs. Vītam meam petīvistī. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1 Porsenna, ae: Porsenna (a proper name)3 Mucius, (ī) Scaevola (ae): Mucius Scaevola4 inquit: he said. Inquit, as here, is always put after the first words of a direct quotation.

Id nōn sine auxiliō neque sine cōnsiliō ēgistī. Sī5 dē cōnsiliīs vestrīs mē monueris, vītam tuam

servābō et tē dīmittam.”

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5 sī: if

Page 205: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2 W9 Reading No. 16 cont.

Mūcius autem rēgī, “Omnēs Rōmānī,” inquit,4 “ad mortem parātī sunt. Perīculō mortis

nōn movēbuntur. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4 inquit: he said. Inquit, as here, is always put after the first words of a direct quotation.

Multī mittentur in castra ad tē quī tē occīdant. Nōn vītam sed cīvitātem nostrum servābimus.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Ego enim neque ā tē terreor neque metū mortis terrēbor.”

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Erat autem ibi ante6 rēgem ignis.7 Tum Mūcius, ut rēx virtūtem Rōmānam cognōsceret,

manum dexteram8 in igne7 statim posuit neque dolōre9 superātus est.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6 ante, prep. w/acc.: before7 ignis, is, m.: fire8 manum dexteram: right hand9 dolor, dolōris: pain

Page 206: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2 W9 Reading No. 16 cont.

Porsenna autem virtūte Mūciī vehementer mōtus est. Itaque ējus et vītam cōnservāvit et

virtūtem laudāvit. Eum etiam in castra Rōmānōrum dīmīsit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Post id rēx lēgātōs ad imperātōrem Rōmānum mīsit quī pācem peterent. Ita cīvitās Rōmāna

virtūte Mūciī servāta est.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 207: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

4. PURPOSE CLAUSES INTRODUCED BY QUO (pg 263 – 266)

When a purpose clause contains a COMPARATIVE, quō is used instead of ut but not instead of nē. Quō in these clauses never changes its spelling. We shall study comparatives later. For the present remember only that the sign of a comparative is the adverb more or the ending -er. These are comparative adverbs:

diūtius, longerfacilius, more easily

He sent reinforcemnets that the legion might more easily conquer the enemy.Auxilia mīsit nē diūtius hostēs pugnārent.

Note: The comparative stands regularly IMMEDIATELY AFTER the quō or nē.

MEMORIZE THE COMPLETE GRAMMAR RULE FOR PURPOSE CLAUSES, GRAMMAR, NO. 546

No. 546

Adverbial Clauses: Purpose Clauses

Purpose clauses are introduced by:

1. ut (negative: nē)2. quī, quae, quod3. quō (negative: nē) before a comparative;

Mood: subjunctive;

Tense: after a primary tense, use the present;

after a secondary tense, use the imperfect.

Page 208: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9 Vocabulary (pg 263)

diūtius, comparative adv. - longer

facilius, comparative adv. - more easily

appropinquō, 1., intr.; w. ad or dat. - draw near to, approach

vastō, 1, tr. - lay waste, ravage

custōs, custōdis - guard

Note:1. Guards are usually soldiers. Therefore what gender is custōs?2. Appropinquō is intransitive. The English object of approach or draw near to is expressed by

AD with the accusative or by the DATIVE. This is the meaning of the notation: "intr.; w. ad or dat. " in the vocabulary.

Hostēs ad hīberna (hībernīs) appropinquant.The enemy draws near to the winter quarters.(or) The enemy approaches the winter quarters.

Related English Words (pg 264)

Modern war brings terrible devastation. The police took the criminal into custody. I am the custodian of this property.

Related Latin Words (pg 264): Facilis; facile.

Page 209: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercises 275 – 278, Reading No 17 (pg 264 - 266)- Assigned in Ch B - #275 – 276

Exercise 275 (page 264)

Translate. Diagram Sentence 1.

1. Lēgātus custōdēs ad flūmen statim collocāvit quō facilius pontem dēfenderent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Ducēs Rōmānī agrōs Gallōrum vastābant nē diūtius bellum gererent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Caesar centuriōnēs et tribūnōs mīlitum saepe appellābat quō diūtius pugnārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Imperātor auxilium in prīmam aciem mīsit quō diūtius et facilius mīlitēs hostēs pellerent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Equitēs ad mūrum appropinquāvērunt; mīlitēs autem portae appropinquāvērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Diagram Sentence 1:

Page 210: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W9

Exercise 276 (page 264)

Translate:

1. They killed the guards that they might more easily approach the camp.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. They killed the hostages that the enemy might not fight longer..

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. They drove the enemy into the town that they might more easily lay waste the fields.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. The lieutenant gave rewards to the soldiers that they might fight longer.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. They stationed guards on the bridge to defend it more easily.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. They fortified the winter quarters with a rampart and a ditch that they might repulse the enemy more easily.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 9

Page 211: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 10

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

10 Lesson 24 - 25

pg 265 - 276

502-503, 140 #279-281, 283-284, #286-288, 290

Read No. 17 (from Unit 6)

267, 269, 272, 275

Reading No.17: Report from the Front

The radio has brought the great events of the world into our own parlors. Ringside and battlefront broadcasts keep us up with the news as it happens. Let us imagine that we are ancient Romans, seated in our home at Rome and listening to a broadcast direct from a winter quarters of Caesar’s army in Gaul.

“Your announcer is Quintus Titurius Mucius, with the Second Legion in their Belgian winter

quarters. Your friends here have been enjoying a very quiet winter. The Belgians (clāmōrēs subitō1

per radiophōniam2 ā nōbīs audiuntur) . . . (Excitedly) Friends, this is it . . .

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Hostēs appropinquant. Hībernīs nostrīs appropinquiant! . . . Usque ad portās celeriter appropinquant!

Audītis clāmōrem et hostium et nostrōrum.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Prīncipēs et ducēs, virī fortēs, etiam cum eīs appropinquant. Etiam Rēgem eōrum videō! Custōdēs

nostrōs statim gladiīs occīdunt et eōs quī in mūrō sunt tēlīs occīdunt quō facilius hīberna oppugnent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 212: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Nostrī omnēs statim ad arma vocantur. (Vōcēs centuriōnum per radiophōniam2 audiuntur.) Tribūnī

mīlitum mūrōs hominibus complent! Equitēs per portās celeriter mittuntur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Acriter cum Gallīs pugnant! . . . (Magnus clāmor subitō1 audītur.) Rēx . . . Rēx hostium tēlīs occīsus

est! Nunc hostēs pelluntur! Cēdunt! Silvās petunt!

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Sed lēgātus noster, vir bonus et fortis, equitēs nunc mittit quī eōs omnēs occīdant. Friends, it’s all over

and may that be a lesson to them. Fortūna legiōnēs Rōmānās semper adjuvat.”

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

_______________________

1 subito, adv.: suddenly

2 radiophonia, ae: radio

Note on Translation

The English meanings given in the vocabularies for Latin words give only the basic or general meaning of the Latin. Frequently in translating from Latin into English you should use some other word, generally a synonym, which expresses the same MEANING as the Latin word but which sounds better in English. Remember your translations should always MAKE SENSE and be GOOD ENGLISH.

For example, you have learned that magnus, a, um means large or great. The Romans used magnus much more frequently than we do large or great. We would often use different adjectives in English to modify different nouns. Thus magna spēs would be better translated by high hope than by large hope or great hope.

Page 213: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

UNIT 7 (pg 267 - 292)

LESSON 25: DIRECT QUESTIONS (pg 267 - 279)

Introduction

Ordinary-questions which are addressed directly to a person are called DIRECT QUESTIONS and are generally in the indicative mood.

Direct questions, as we have seen, may be introduced by: 1. Interrogative adverbs: Cūr vēnisti? Why have you come?2. Interrogative particles: Vidēsne? Do you see? 3. Interrogative adjectives and pronouns: Quid vīdistī? What did you see?

1. Interrogative Adverbs (p 267 - 269)

Questions may be introduced by INTERROGATIVE ADVERBS.

Ubi fuistī? Where were you?

C ū r vēnit? Why did he come?

Since these words are adverbs, they are not declined and never change their spelling.

Vocabulary (pg 267)

ubi - where?

cūr – why?

unde – whence? from what place? where. . . from?

quō – whither? where . . . (to)? to what place?

Note (pg 268)Ubi and quō can translate the English where. Ubi can be used only when the where refers to place IN WHICH and implies REST; quō can be used only when where refers to place TO WHICH and implies MOTION or direction. Unde can be used only of place FROM WHICH and implies MOTION or direction.

Ubi es? Where are you? Quō cōntendis? Where are you hastening? Unde venīs? Where do you come from?

Page 214: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercises 279 – 282 (p 268-269) – Assigned in Ch B - # 279 - 281

Exercise 279 (page 268)

Translate:

1. Ubi erās?

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Quō contendis?

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Unde vēnistī?

_________________________________________________________________________

4. Cūr Caesar bellum cum Gallīs gessit?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

5. Quō lēgātus ā senātū missus est?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

6. Cūr sunt Chrīstiānī et ad labōrēs et ad mortem parātī?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

7. Cūr Gallī saepe obsidēs inter sē dedērunt?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

Page 215: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 279 cont.

8. Cūr victōriās patrum nostrōrum semper memoriā tenēbimus?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

9. Cūr nōs Americānī amīcitiam cum omnibus gentibus cōnfirmāmus?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

10. Cūr grātiās Deō agimus?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

11. Cūr Rōmānī hīberna vallō fossāque mūnīvērunt?

________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________

Page 216: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 280 (page 268)

Answer in complete Latin sentences and shown in Sentence 1:

Consult map on page 166

1. Ubi est urbs Rōma? (ANSWER: Urbs Rōma est in Italiā.)

2. Ubi est flūmen Tiberis?

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Ubi sunt Alpēs?

_________________________________________________________________________

4. Ubi erat prōvincia cūjus imperium Caesar obtinēbat?

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Ubi erant Gallī?

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Ubi Caesar, imperātor Rōmānus, cum Gallīs bellum gessit?

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Quō Caesar ā senātū missus est?

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 217: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 281 (pg 269)

Translate

1. Where were the guards?

___________________________________________________________________

2. Whence have you led the new forces?

___________________________________________________________________

3. Where have you hastened from?

___________________________________________________________________

4. Where will the lieutenant lead the legions?

___________________________________________________________________

5. Whither will you hasten?

___________________________________________________________________

6. To what place are you sending the envoys?

___________________________________________________________________

7. Why did you yield to the enemy?

___________________________________________________________________

8. Why did the Romans fortify the camp with a ditch and a rampart?

___________________________________________________________________

Page 218: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

1. INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES (p 269 – 271)

ASSIGNMENT: Study Grammar, Nos. 502 – 503

DIRECT QUESTIONS

No. 502: DEFINITION: A direct question is one addressed directly to someone, and which used the exact words of the original speaker.

Quis es? Who are you? Centuriō, “Quis,” inquit, “vēnit?” The centurion said, “Who came?”

No. 503: Direct questions are introduced by: 1. interrogative pronouns, adjectives, and adverbs2. nōnne if the answer “yes” is expected. 3. Num – if the answer “no” is expected or to express surprise4. -ne to ask for information (Add -ne to the emphatic word and put first in the sentence.)

Pronoun: Quis es? Who are you?

Adjective: Quam urbem oppugnāvērunt? Which city did they attack?

Adverb: Ubi sunt? Where are they?

Nōnne: Nōnne Deus est bonus? God is good, isn't He? Isn't God good? (Answer: 'yes')

Num: Num Caesar victus est? Caesar wasn't conquered, was he? Surely Ceasar wasn't conquered? (Answer: 'no')

-Ne: Vīdistīne Rōmam? Have you seen Rome? (Answer: “I have seen Rome” or “I have not seen Rome.; 'yes' or 'no')

Page 219: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Vocabulary (pg 269)

certus, a, um - certain, sure

barbarus, a, um – barbarian

apud, prep. w. acc – among, in the presence of

plūrimum, adv. - very much, very

valeō, valēre, valuī, valitūrus, 2. intr. - am strong, am well, am influential

cernō, cernere, 3. tr. - distinguish, see

Note: Barbarus can, of course, be used as a noun to mean barbarian: Barbarī pulsī sunt. The barbarians were routed.

Related English words (p 270)

A valid argument; a valiant warrior.

Page 220: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10 Exercise 283 (pg 270)

Translate, and give the "expected" answer in complete Latin sentences;

1. Valēsne?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

2. Num mīlitēs sine certā spē fortiter pugnant?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

3. Nōnne legiōnēs Rōmānae barbarōs facile superāvērunt?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

4. Nōnne virī quī fortēs sunt apud barbarōs plūrimum valent?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

5. Num amīcus certus et fortis facile cernitur?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

Page 221: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10 Exercise 283 cont.

6. Nōnne vir fortis in mortis perīculō facile cernitur?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

7. Nōnne victōriās legiōnum Rōmānārum laudābis?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

8. Num Columbus sine magnō labōre ad terrās novās pervēnit?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

9. Vidistīne Rōmam? Veniēsne in Italiam ut eam videās?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

10. Nōnne ācriter pugnābimus ut cīvitātem nostram dēfendāmus?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

Page 222: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 283 cont.

11. Nōnne Caesar plūrimum apud Rōmānōs valēbit?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

12.Num imperātōrēs apud Americānōs plūrimum valent?

_____________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

13. Nōnne amīcī apud amīcōs plūrimum valent?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

Page 223: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes
Page 224: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 284 (pg 270)

Translate:

1. Was the chief influential among the Romans on account of his faithfulness?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

2. You won’t hand over the arms to the Romans, will you?

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

3. You will defend our free nation, won’t you?

_____________________________________________________________________

4. The lieutenant said1: “You see the battle line of the barbarians. They are prepared both

for death and for victory. Surely you don’t fear them, soldiers!

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1 said: inquit (after first words of quotation)

Page 225: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 284 cont.

You are brave, are you not? You are Romans, are you not? Will you fight bravely for the

Roman name? Are you not fighting with a sure hope of victory?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Is not the cavalry prepared for battle? Haven’t we a large supply of arms and darts? What do

you fear? Do you fear death?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

But men who are eager for glory are always prepared for either death or victory. We are

Romans; they are barbarians and Gauls.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 226: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 284 cont.

Barbarians will not conquer a Roman legion, will they? Is not Caesar our leader? Do not the

barbarians also praise Caesar, do they not fear him?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

They will fight without a sure hope of victory. They will not withstand your attack. They will

yield. They will be routed. Your victory will be the glory of the Roman Senate and People.

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

_

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 227: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes
Page 228: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10 3. THE INTERROGATIVE PRONOUN (p 271 – 274)

Who are you?

To whom did you give the sword?

What did you see?

Whose towns did he burn?

In these sentences who, whom, what, whose are INTERROGATIVES because they introduce a question. (Interrogō in Latin means I ask, I question.)

Who, whom, what, whose are PRONOUNS because they take the place of the person or thing to which they refer. They do not DIRECTLY modify a noun.

The Latin interrogative pronoun is QUIS, QUID, who, what.

ASSIGNMENT: Learn the declension of quis, quid in Grammar, No. 140

The Interrogative Pronoun

No. 140: WHO? WHAT?

[For Person] Neut.

Sing Nom. quis quis quidSing Gen. cūjus cūjus cūjusSing Dat. cui cui cuiSing Acc. quem quem quidSing Abl. quō3 quō quō

[For Person] Neut.

Pl. Nom. quī quae quaePl. Gen. quōrum quārum quōrumPl. Dat. quibus quibus quibusPl. Acc. quōs quās quaePl. Abl. quibus quibus quibus

3 Quōcum (or quīcum) and quibuscum are used instead of cum, quō, cum quibus.

Page 229: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Study the translations of the examples given above:

Quis es?

Cui gladium dedistī?

Quid vīdistī?

Quōrum oppida incendit?

Vocabulary (pg 272)

quis, quid - who? what?

ostendō, ostendere, ostendī, ostentus, 3, tr. - show

trādūcō, trādūcere, trādūxī, trāductus, 3, tr.; two accs. or acc. and trāns w. acc. - lead across

clam, adv. - secretly

socius, ī - ally

Note: With trādūcō the thing OVER WHICH the direct object is led, is put either (1) in the accusative or (2) with trāns in the accusative.

Exercitum flūmen trādūxit. Exercitum trāns flūmen trādūxit. He led the army across the river.

Related English word (p 272)A society of nations.

AMĪCUS CERTUS IN RĒ INCERTĀ CERNITUR - Ennius

incertus, a, um: uncertain, dubious

S2W10

Page 230: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Exercises 286 – 289 (p 272 - 289) – Assigned in Challenge B - #286 - 288

Exercise 286 (page 272)

Translate

1. Quibuscum pugnāvit Caesar?

________________________________________________________________________________

2. Cui Gallī obsidēs dedērunt?

_______________________________________________________________________________

3. Quī erant Caesaris sociī?

________________________________________________________________________________

4.Legiō sē barbaris nōn ostendit ut clam in castra pervenīret?

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. Quis plūrimum apud Americānōs nunc valet?

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. Quis exercitum flūmen trādūxit?

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

7. Quis exercitum trāns montēs altōs et flūmina lāta trādūxit ut in Italiā cum Rōmānís bellum

gereret?__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

8. Quis lēgem sānctam et lūcem vēritātis nōbīs dedit?

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

9. Cui castra nostrā ostendistī?

_________________________________________________________________________________

S2W10

Page 231: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Exercise 287 (pg 273)

Translate

(When the English may be either singular or plural, translate both ways in Latin.)

1. To whom did you give the reward?

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. With whom were you?

_________________________________________________________________________________

3. Whom did you see?

_________________________________________________________________________________

4. Whose courage do you praise?

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. What do you seek?

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. What (things) did you hear?

_________________________________________________________________________________

7. What did he show you?

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 232: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 287 cont.

8. Who came secretly into the camp?

_________________________________________________________________________________

9. Who are your allies?

_________________________________________________________________________________

10. For what are you prepared?

________________________________________________________________________________

11. To whom did you send help?

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 233: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 288 (pg 273)

[Honor Work]

Translate:

Washington1, a brave and noble man, whose courage we all keep in memory, was the American

general in our first war.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

He led the troops across the river Delaware2 to conquer the Germans3 who were in the British4 army.

It was night.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

The soldiers were neither seen nor heard by the enemy. Thus he swiftly and easily conquered the

enemy. We shall all praise Washington’s1 plan and courage, shall we not?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

____________________________________

1 Washington: Washingtonius, ī2. Delaware: Delawarēnse, Delawarēnsis3 Germans: Germānī, Germānōrum4 British: Britannicus, a, um

Page 234: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 288 cont.

Answer in Latin

1. Quis fuit Washingtonius?

______________________________________________________________________________

2. Quī eum laudant?

_______________________________________________________________________________

3. Quibuscum bellum gessit?

________________________________________________________________________________

4. Cernēbanturne ējus míīitēs ab hostibus?

________________________________________________________________________________

5. Quós vīcít Washingtonius?

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 235: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W104. THE INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE (p 274 – 279)

Which men did you see?

Quōs virōs vīdistī?

Quōs here modifies and agrees with virōs. It is used, therefore, as an ADJECTIVE and not as a pronoun. It is an INTERROGATIVE because it introduces a question.

The INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVE in Latin is declined exactly like the relative pronoun.

But in the NOMINATIVE MASCULINE SINGULAR quis is generally used as an adjective for which or what, quī for what sort of, what kind of.

Vocabulary (pg 275)

quī, quae, quod - which? what?

Review Vocabulary (pg 275)

vocō, 1, tr.; two accs. - callappellō, 1, tr.; two accs. - call, call upon, addressostendō, ostendere, odstendī, ostentus, 3, tr – shownōmen, nōminis – name

Idiom Study

Verbs of calling, naming, making, showing, etc. may take two accusatives, one of the direct object, the other a predicate accusative.

Caesarem imperātōrem appellāvērunt. They called Caesar general.

But when nōmen is used, nōmen is in the ablative.

Caesarem nōmine imperātōris appellāvērunt. They called Caesar by the name of general.

Caesar centuriōnēs nōmine appellāvit. Caesar called upon the centurions by name.

Page 236: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Exercises 290 – 293, Reading No. 18 (p 275 - 279) – Assigned in Challenge B - #290,

Exercise 290 (page 275)

Translate

1. With which allies? _______________________________________________________________

2. With the army of which king? ______________________________________________________

3. On account of what wrongs? _______________________________________________________

4. In which towns? _______________________________________________________________

5. In what camp? __________________________________________________________________

6. Among which tribes? ______________________________________________________________

7. Up to what river? _______________________________________________________________

8. By what name did they call you? ____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

9. What guards did he station? ________________________________________________________

10. What man called Caesar king? _____________________________________________________

11. In what place did he pitch camp? ___________________________________________________

12. To what messenger did he give the letters? ___________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

13. To which envoys did he send the letters? __________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 237: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W10

Exercise 290 cont.

14. Christ called us brothers. _________________________________________________________

15. For what are arms useful? ________________________________________________________

16. Which town are we approaching? __________________________________________________

17. What rivers are wide and deep? ____________________________________________________

18. What tribes are exchanging hostages? _______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

19. To what town does the bridge stretch? _______________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

20. To what guard did he show himself? _____________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

21. To what king do they give thanks? _________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

22. In what thing do they put hope? ____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 10

Page 238: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 11

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

11 Lesson 25 - 26

pg 276 - 290

200-207, 524-526 #291-292 (from lesson 25), #296-302

Read No. 19,

280, 283

287

Exercise 291 (page 276)

Quiz on American History

Can you score 100%?

1. Propter quās injūriās nōs bellum cum Japōnibus gessimus?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Quis nuntius quem omnēs memoriā tenēmus per oppida contendit ut omnēs adventum Britannōrum

exspectārent?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Quis imperātor Americānus trāns flūmen quod Delaware vocāmus exercitum trādūxit ut ad castra

hostium clam pervenīret?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 239: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

4. Cui gentī1 grātiās Americānī ēgimus propter auxilium quod in prīmō nostrō bellō ad nōs mīsit?

_____________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1 gentī: “gens” here means “nation”

5. Quis dux cōpiās nostrās in Bataan dēdūxit quō diūtius cum Japōnibus pugnāret?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. In quō bellō hostēs urbem Washington incendērunt?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Quem ducem mīlitēs “Stonewall” appellāvērunt?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Quī Gallī prīmī vīdērunt flūmen quod Mississippi vocāmus?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 240: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 292

Translate:

1. Augustus prīmus imperātor1 Rōmānus fuit. Augustus autem nōn rēgem sed prīncipem sē

vocāvit, nam Rōmānī nōmen rēgis timuērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Omnēs Americānī Washingtonium “Patrem Patriae” 2 appellāvērunt. Washingtonius enim

cīvitātem nostram dēfendit atque cōnservāvit sīcut patrēs fīliōs dēfendunt atque cōnservant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Rēx et imperātor Germānōrum sē “Caesarem” 3 appellāvit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1 imperātor here means nation2. patria, ae: country, fatherland2 The word Kaiser ís a German form for Caesar.

Answer in complete Latin sentences:

1. Quō nōmine Augustus sē vocāvit?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Quō nōmine Americānī Washingtonium appellāvērunt?

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

3. Quis rēx “Caesarem” sē appellāvit?

______________________________________________________________________

______________________________________________________________________

Page 241: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

LESSON 26: THE PERFECT SYSTEM ACTIVE OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE (280 - 292)

1. PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE ACTIVE (p 280 – 281)

The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive of all LATIN VERBS regular and irregular, are formed in the same way.

1. Find the perfect stem - laudāv-, monu-, mīs-, audīv-, fu-2. Add the endings shown in Grammar Nos 200 – 207

No 200

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 laudāv-erim (whether) I praised

Sing 2 laudāv-erīs (whether) you praised

Sing. 3 laudāv-erit (whether) he, she, it praised

Pl. 1 laudāv-erīmus (whether) we praised

Pl. 2 laudāv-erītis (whether) you praised

Pl. . 3 laudāv-erint (whether) they praised

No 201

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

Sing 1 laudāv-issem (whether) I had praised

Sing 2 laudāv-issēs (whether) you had praised

Sing. 3 laudāv-issēt (whether) he, she, it had praised

Pl. 1 laudāv-issēmus (whether) we had praised

Pl. 2 laudāv-issētis (whether) you had praised

Pl. . 3 laudāv-issent (whether) they had praised

Page 242: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

No 202

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 monu-erim (whether) I advised

Sing 2 monu-erīs (whether) you advised

Sing. 3 monu-erit (whether) he, she, it advised

Pl. 1 monu-erīmus (whether) we advised

Pl. 2 monu-erītis (whether) you advised

Pl. . 3 monu-erint (whether) they advised

No 203

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 mīs-erim (whether) I sent

Sing 2 mīs-erīs (whether) you sent

Sing. 3 mīs-erit (whether) he, she, it sent

Pl. 1 mīs-erīmus (whether) we sent

Pl. 2 mīs-erītis (whether) you sent

Pl. . 3 mīs-erint (whether) they sent

Page 243: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

No 204

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 audīv-erim (whether) I heard

Sing 2 audīv-erīs (whether) you heard

Sing. 3 audīv-erit (whether) he, she, it heard

Pl. 1 audīv-erīmus (whether) we heard

Pl. 2 audīv-erītis (whether) you heard

Pl. . 3 audīv-erint (whether) they heard

No 205

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

Sing 1 monu-issem (whether) I had advised

Sing 2 monu-issēs (whether) you had advised

Sing. 3 monu-issēt (whether) he, she, it had advised

Pl. 1 monu-issēmus (whether) we had advised

Pl. 2 monu-issētis (whether) you had advised

Pl. . 3 monu-issent (whether) they had advised

Page 244: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

No 206

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

Sing 1 mīs-issem (whether) I had sent

Sing 2 mīs-issēs (whether) you had sent

Sing. 3 mīs-issēt (whether) he, she, it had sent

Pl. 1 mīs-issēmus (whether) we had sent

Pl. 2 mīs-issētis (whether) you had sent

Pl. . 3 mīs-issent (whether) they had sent

No 207

Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, Perfect Active Stem

Sing 1 audīv-issem (whether) I had heard

Sing 2 audīv-issēs (whether) you had heard

Sing. 3 audīv-issēt (whether) he, she, it had heard

Pl. 1 audīv-issēmus (whether) we had heard

Pl. 2 audīv-issētis (whether) you had heard

Pl. . 3 audīv-issent (whether) they had heard

Vocabulary (p 280)

incolō, incolere, incoluī, 3, tr. - inhabit, dwell in

cōnsistō, cōnsistere, cōnstitī, 3, intr. - halt, take a position

Exercises 294 – 295 (p 280-281) – Not assigned in Challenge B

Page 245: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

2. INDIRECT QUESTIONS: PRIMARY SEQUENCE (p 281 – 286)

As we have seen, a question asked directly is called a DIRECT QUESTION.

Estne Deus bonus? Is God good?

Valēsne? Are you well?

When a question, however, DEPENDS on a verb of ASKING, SAYING, THINKING, and the like, it is called an INDIRECT QUESTION.

Rogō sitne Deus bonus. I ask whether God is good.

Rogō valeāsne. I ask whether you are well.

Sitne Deus bonus and valeāsne are INDIRECT QUESTIONS because they depend on the verb rogō. Indirect questions are NOUN CLAUSES because theya re used as the OBJECT of a verb ( (rogō).

Indirect questions may be introduced by the same adverbs, adjectives, pronouns, and particles as direct questions, but:

- Ne and num in indirect questions mean whether (if). 1. Nōnne is seldom used.2. Quī is sometimes used for quis.

He asks whether Caesar conquered the Gauls. Rogat num Caesar Gallōs vīcerit.

He asks who Caesar was. Rogat quis Caesar fuerit.

He asks where we are. Rogat ubi sīmus.

The TENSE in indirect questions is determined by the rule: TENSE BY SEQUENCE.

THE MOOD IN INDIRECT QUESTIONS IS ALWAYS SUBJUNCTIVE.

Page 246: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

ASSIGNMENT: Learn the general rule, Grammar, Nos 524 – 526

No. 524

Primary and Secondary Tenses. The tenses of the indicative and subjunctive are divided into two groups:

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE

Present These are the PRIMARY TENSES

Present

Future Perfect

Future Perfect

INDICATIVE SUBJUNCTIVE

Imperfect These are the SECONDARYTENSES

Imperfect

Perfect Pluperfect

Pluperfect

No. 525

Primary Sequence.

When the verb in the main clause is a PRIMARY TENSE, the verb in the subordinate clause must be a PRIMARY TENSE.

Rogō quis veniat. I ask who is coming.

Rogābō quis veniat. I shall ask who is coming.

Rogāverō quis veniat. I shall have asked who is coming.

No. 526

Secondary Sequence.

When the verb in the main clause is a SECONDARY TENSE, the verb in the subordinate clause must be a SECONDARY tense.

Rogāvī quis essēs. I asked who you were.

Rogābam quis essēs. I was asking who you were.

Rogāveram quis essēs. I had asked who you were.

Page 247: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

IN PRIMARY SEQUENCE:

1. Use the PRESENT subjunctive when the action of the verb in the indirect questions happens AT THE SAME TIME as the action of the main verb.

Caesar asks whether the soldiers are fighting. Caesar rogat num mīlitēs pugnent.

2. Use the PERFECT subjunctive when the action of the verb in the indirect question happens BEFORE the action of the main verb.

Caesar asks whether the soldiers were fighting (fought). Caesar rogat num mīlitēs pugnāverint.

Vocabulary (pg 283)

rogō, 1, tr - ask

quaerō, quaerere, quaesīvī, quaesītus, 3, tr. - seek, ask

quantus, a, um, interrogative adj. - how large? How great?

mūnītiō, mūnītiōnis - fortification

genus, generis, n. - kind, race

aqua, ae – water

Related English Words (pg 283)

The prisoner of war was interrogated. He was asked many questions. Modern wars require a great quantity of munitions. What is the genus of this tree? The Romans built many long aqueducts. Aquatic sports are much in favor at the Florida beaches. Rogation days.

Related Latin Word (p 283) - Mūniō

Page 248: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 296 – 298, Reading No 19 (p 283 – 286)- Assigned in Ch B - #296 – 298, Reading #19

Exercise 296 (pg 283)

1. Point out the indirect question;

2. Point out the introductory word;

3. Explain the mood and tense in the indirect question;

4. Diagram sentences 1 and 5

5. Translate:

1. Rogat num cōpiam aquae habeāmus.__________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Rogat num Caesar Gallōs vīcerit._____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Quaeret ubi hostēs cōnstiterint._______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Quaeret ubi cōpia aquae sit. _________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Rogat quis imperātor sit. ____________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Quaerit quōs Caesar vīcerit. _________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 249: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 296 cont.

7. Rogābit valeantne mīlitēs. ___________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Quaeret vīceritne Caesar barbarōs. ___________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Rogat quae genera hominum Americam incolant. ________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Quaerit quae genera hominum Galliam tum incoluerint. ___________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Quaeret quantās mūnítiōnēs hostēs parāverint. ________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Rogābit quae mūnítiōnum genera nōs parēmus. ________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Rogat quae gentēs Galliam incolant. _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. Quaerit quae gentēs prōvinciam incoluerint. ____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 250: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 297 (page 284)

Imitate the word order and structure of the model in translating.

MODEL: Rogō quōs mīlitēs vīderit.

I ask what soldiers he saw.

1. I ask what hostages he killed. _______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. I ask what general he praised. _______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. I ask what plans he has learned. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. I ask what hills he has occupied. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

MODEL: Rogat ubi mīlitēs sint.

He asks where the soldiers are.

5. I ask where the general ís. __________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. I ask where the enemy ís. ___________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. I ask where the fortifications are. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. I ask where the winter quarters are. ___________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 251: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 298 (pg 284)

1. Translate and explain the translation of the italicized phrases:

a. They sent letters to the Senate.

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

b. They gave rewards to the slave.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Give the rule for agreement of relative pronouns.

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Translate; then parse ad and pugnātum est: Ad flūmen diū pugnātum est.

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Give the complete rule for purpose clauses.

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 252: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11 Reading No. 19 (page 285)

WAR INFORMATIONIt is of vital importance for a general to have the fullest possible information about the

enemy before committing his troops to battle. Many military disasters have been due to ignorance

either of the enemy’s force and disposition or of the detail of the battleground. When the Battle of

Gettysburg opened, Lee’s scouts were away on a foraging expedition. The Union army was

therefore able to reconnoiter and seize the most strategic points on the field and fight the action

from chosen positions. Lee’s army was terribly defeated.

Today every resource is used to discover vital war information. Hitler’s invasion of Poland

was backed by scientific study of every pertinent detail. Even the weather conditions had been

calculated. During the years preceding the invasion of Europe in World War II, Allied experts

studies the minutest detail of the invasion coast of Fortress Europe. Planes, spies, maps,

scientists, travelers, refugees—all were used to place before the general staff the fullest possible

information.

Military experts have always recognized the importance of such information. Caesar, too,

though he lacked maps of modern technical excellence, as well as planes and swift-moving

scouting cars, made extensive inquiries before launching a campaign. There were Roman spies,

Gallic refugees, merchants—all of whom he consulted. The Roman army sent out cavalry and

special scouts (explōrātōres) to study the terrain (nātūra locī) and the disposition of the opposing

forces.

What then would a general wish to know?

Ante1 proelium imperātor lēgātōs et tribūnōs mīlitum in concilium vocat. In conciliō quaerit

quantum numerum et equitum et mīlitum hostēs habeant, ubi castra hostium sint, quantās

parāverint mūnītiōnēs; num cōpiam aquae et frūmentī habeant; quantam armōrum cōpiam

habeant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 253: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Quaerit etiam quae sint portūs et flūmina et montēs in hostium fīnibus; quae genera hominum eās

partēs incolant; num omnia quae ad bellum pertinent parāverint; num fortēs sint et cupidī bellī

glōriae; num ācriter pugnent; quōs ducēs habeant, num bonī sint.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Ante1 proelia imperātor equitēs mittit quī nātūram locī explōrent et cognōscant ubi hostēs

cōnstiterint. Cognōscit num aciem īnstrūxerint; num ad proelium sint parātī.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

___________________________

1 ante, prep. w/accusative: before.

Ita Caesar et omnēs magnī ducēs saepe hostēs superāvērunt quod omnia quae ad proelium

pertinent cognōverant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 254: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

SECONDARY SEQUENCE (p 286 - 292)

We have seen that the MOOD in indirect questions is always subjunctive and that the TENSE is determinded by the rule: TENSE BY SEQUENCE. Review the general rule, Grammar Nos. 524 – 526.

IN SECONDARY SEQUENCE:

1. Use the IMPERFECT subjunctive when the action of the verb in the indirect question happens AT THE SAME TIME as the action of the main verb.

Caesar rogāvit num mīlitēs pugnārent. Caesar asked whether the soldiers were fighting.

2. Use the PLUPERFECT subjunctive when the action of the verb in the indirect question happens BEFORE the action of the main verb.

Caesar rogāvit num mīlitēs pugnāvissent. Caesar asked whether the soldiers had fought.

Vocabulary (pg 287)

cōgō, cōgere, coēgī, coāctus, 3, tr. - collect, force

vērus, a, um – true

inquit – he says, he said

Note: Inquit is always used with DIRECT quotations; that is, with quotations enclosed in QUOTATION MARKS:

Chrīstus, “Vos,” inquit, “frātrēs estis.” Christ said, “You are brothers.”

This is a direct quotation because it contains the EXACT words used by Christ and is therefore enclosed in quotation marks. Notice that inquit does NOT stand before the quotation but is ALWAYS put after one or several words of the quotation.

Related English Words (pg 287)A cogent argument. The eternal verities. A veracious witness. We cannot question the veracity of St. John.

Related Latin Words (p 287): Vēritās, agō

Page 255: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercises 299 – 303, Reading No. 20 (p 287 - 292) – Assigned in Challenge B - # 299 – 302

Exercise 299 (page 287)

[Secondary Sequence]

1. Translate

2. Explain the tense of the italicized word.

1. Lēgātus quaesīvit quantam aquae cōpiam mīlitēs habērent. ________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Lēgātus quaesīvit ubi hostēs cōnstitissent. ___________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Barbarī quaesīvērunt quantam mīlitum cōpiam Rōmānī coēgissent. _________________

_________________________________________________________________________

4. Barbarī quaesīvērunt ubi Rōmānī castra posuissent. ____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Quaesīverat quae esset nātūra montis. _______________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Quaesīverat quantum obsidum numerum lēgātus coēgisset. ______________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Quaerēbat quī portūs essent in eīs locīs. ______________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Quaerēbant num hostēs collēs occupvāissent. _________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Rōmānus, “Quaerō,” inquit, “num Deus vester sit Deus vērus.” _____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 256: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 300 (page 288)

Imitate the word order and structure of the model

MODEL: Centuriō quaerēbat num cōpia frūmentī in castrīs esset.

The centurion was asking whether there was a supply of grain in the camp.

1. The military tribune was asking whether there was an abundance of water in the winter quarters.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

2. The lieutenant was asking whether there was a bridge on the river.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

3. The barbarians were asking whether there were soldiers in the Forest.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

MODEL: Lēgātus quaesīvit ubi Gallī constitissent.

The lieutenant asked where the Gauls had taken up a position.

1. The leader asked where the enemy had stationed the guards.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

2. Caesar asked where the Gauls had prepared fortifications.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

3. The barbarians asked where Caesar had drawn up the troops.

_____________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________________________________________

Page 257: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 301 (pg 288)

1. Translate

2. Parse the italicized words:

1. Lēgātus, “Quaerō,” inquit, “quī sint sociī vestrī.”

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

2. Tribūnus mílitum quaesīvit quae hominum genera loca incolerent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

3. Rōmānī magnās mūnītiōnēs parāvērunt quō facilius hostēs pellerent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

4. Barbarī impetum in agmen fēcērunt nē míīitēs certum ōrdinem servārent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

5. Quaerō num Caesar plūrimum apud Rōmānōs valuerit.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

6. Quaerit num amīcus vērus atque certus facile cernātur.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

7. Nōnne Chrīstiānī Chrīstum nōmine rēgis appellant?

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

8. Quaerō num Chrīstum rēgem atque Dominum vocētis.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 258: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 301 cont.

9. Rogāvit quō prīncipēs convēnissent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

10. Diu atque ācriter pugnātum est in locō angustō et difficilī nē hostēs agmen flūmen trādūcerent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

11. Lēgātum mīsit quí obsidēs clam ad castra dēdūceret.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

12. Dux rogāvit quantam cōpiam aquae frūmentīque servī in hīberna portāvissent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

13. Eques dūcī ostendit ubi cōpiae hostium cōnstitissent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

14. Quō prīncipēs cōpiās coēgērunt?

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

15. Eī custōdēs occīdērunt et usque ad castra nostrā appropinquāvērunt.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

16. Rōmānī collem vallō fossāque mūnīvērunt quō diūtius cōpiās hostium sustinērent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 259: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 301 cont.

17. Quarit cūr gentēs barbarae obsidēs inter sē dederint.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

18. Dux equitem celeriter mīsit quī auxilium peteret.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

19. Imperātor quasīvit num tribūnī mīlitum omnia comparāvissent.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

20. Rogat unde equitātus contenderit.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 260: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 302 (pg 289)

Translate

1. I asked where the enemy was. _____________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. They asked whether the chief led the barbarians across the river.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

3. They asked whom we called king and emperor.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

4. We asked what chief was influential among them.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. We asked where the barbarians had taken up a stand1

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. They ask what races of men inhabit Gaul now.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

7. We ask what kinds of arms they have.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

8. The lieutenant asked how great fortifications they had prepared.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

1. take up a stand = take a position

Page 261: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W11

Exercise 302 cont.

9. We asked why they were fighting without a sure hope.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

10. We asked where they had led the allies.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

11. He asked whence they had come.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

12. They had secretly collected the hostages into a safe place.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

13. He asked whether they had seen the column of the enemy.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

14. He said, “Aren’t you a brave and sure friend?”

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

15. He addressed the centurions by name, that they might fight longer.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

16. He asked where there was an abundance of water.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 11

Page 262: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 12

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

12 Lesson 26 - 27

pg 290 - 300

28, 208, 216 - 218 #305-306, # 308-310

Read No. 20 (from lesson 26)

293

296

READING NO. 20 (pg 290-292)

BATAAN!Vōs omnēs cognōvistis quantās cōpiās nostrī mīlitēs in Bataan1 diū sustinuissent. Japōnēs

enim magnum et fortem impetum in insulās2 Philippīnās3 fēcērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

1. Bataan, indecl. noun: Bataan 2. insula, ae: island. 3. Philippinus, a, um: Philippine.

Omnia armōrum et tēlōrum genera quae nunc ad bellum ūtilia sunt habēbant. Etiam magnum

numerum omnium generum mīlitum in insulās2 trādūxerant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Quaesīverant quī portūs, quae locī nātūra, quae flūmina essent. Omnia quae ad bellum pertinēbant

cognōverant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 263: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Reading No. 20 cont.

Itaque dux noster, vir magnus et fortis, omnēs cōpiās nostrās in loca difficilia et angusta quae Bataan

vocant dēdūxit quō diūtius impetum hostium sustinēret.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Mūnītiōnēs celeriter parāvit; custōdēs collocāvit; mīlitēs īnstrūxit; impetūs hostium exspectāvit.

Undique nostrī ab hostibus et locī nātūra continēbantur neque erant multī mīlitēs Americānī in Bataan;

tamen diū et ācriter ibi pugnātum est.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Nam nostrī fortēs erant et glōriae nōminis Americānī cupidī erant. Multōs impetūs fortiter sustinuērunt;

saepe hostēs post magnam caedem pepulērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 264: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Reading No. 20 cont.

Interim cognōvimus quantō in perīculō nostrae legiōnēs essent et quaerēbāmus cūr ducēs

nostrī magnam armōrum et mīlitum cōpiam nōn mitterent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Eī tamen omnia perīcula cognōverant. Itaque auxilia nōn mīsērunt nē hostēs ea occīderent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Tandem4 nostrī, propter magnum hostium numerum, nōn diūtius sustinuērunt. Itaque hostibus

sē dedērunt atque arma trādidērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Tandem, adv. finally

Dux autem noster, “The President,” inquit, “of the United States ordered me to break through the

Japanese lines and proceed from Corregidor to Australia for the purpose, as I understand it, of

organizing the American offensive against Japan. A primary purpose of this is the relief of the

Philippines. I came through and I shall return.”

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Nōnne virūtem mīlitum fortium semper laudābimus atque memoriā

tenēbimus? Glōria enim eōrum glōria nostra est. __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 265: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Unit 8 (pg 293 – 324)

Lesson 27: The Vocative; Imperative Mood (pg 293 – 304)

1. The Vocative (pg 293 – 295)You, O Lord, I praise. We shall not help you, Caesar! In these sentences O Lord and Caesar: 1. Show the PERSON ADDRESSED OR SPOKEN TO2. Are therefore in the VOCATIVE case – the case of the PERSON ADDRESSED. 3. Are set off by commas because they are independent of the grammar of the rest of the sentence.

Tē, O Domine, laudō. Tē, Caesar, nōn adjuvābimus.

Assignment: Learn the rule for the formation of the vocative, Grammar No. 28

No. 28 B) The vocative of all nouns and adjectives is always like the nominative except in singular nouns in -us of the second declension: these have -e. Serv-e! Slave! Exceptions: Proper nouns in -ius and fiīius, son, have only -ī in the vocative singular. Vergilius, voc. Vergilī; fīlius, voc. Fīlī. The vocative singular of Deus, God, is Deus; the vocative masculine singular of meus is mī; fīlī mī! My son!

Vocabulary (pg 293)

avē! interjection hail mora, ae delay doceō, docēre, docuī, doctus, 2, tr. - teach, informtollō, tollere, sustulī, sublātus, 3, tr. - raise (up), take away peccātum, i – mistake, sin (in Christian Latin)

Note: Doceō takes two accusatives when it means teach someone something. Christus nōs viam salūtis docet. Christ teaches us the way of salvation.

However, doceō can also be used with other constructions:

Custōs Caesarem docuit ubi hostēs essent. (Indirect question.)

The guard informed Caesar where the enemy was.

Lēgātus eum dē omnibus rēbus docuit. (Dē w. abl)

The lieutenant informed him about all the things (the whole matter).

Rule of position: The vocative in Latin generally does not stand first in the sentence.

Page 266: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Exercises 304 – 307 (pgs 294 – 295) – Assigned in Ch B - #305 – 306

Exercise 305 (pg 295)

Translate

1. Nōnne grātiās agēmus, frātrēs meī, Dominō nostrō Jēsū Chrīstō, quī peccāta mundī

sustulit et nōs vēritātem docuit?________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Avē, Caesar! Docēbō tē ubi hostēs castra posuerint. ______________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Vōs, mīlitēs, sine morā pontem occupābitis nē barbarī eum occupent. ________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Tē, Fīlī Deī, laudāmus. ____________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Centuriō, “Hostēs lēgāte,” inquit, “magnum clāmōrem sustulērunt et sē nōbīs sine morā

dedērunt.” __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. In tē, O bone Jēsū, est spēs omnium. _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Hostēs, rēx magne, virtūte et armīs vīcimus. _____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 267: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Exercise 305 cont

8. Tibi, Deus, grātiās agō; tē, Deus, laudō; in tē, O Deus, est omnis spēs mea.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Tū, Domine, servābis nōs (From the Roman Breviary). ____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Avē, Caesar, imperātor et rēx noster es! ______________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Avē, Jēsū Chrīste, quī prō nōbīs multōs labōrēs atque mortem miseram sustinuistī.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 268: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Exercise 306 (pg 295)

Translate

1. O good Jesus, in You we place all of our hope and faith. ___________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Thou, O God, hast taught us Thy ways. ________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. My son, God will always defend you. ___________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Soldiers, without delay we shall occupy the bridges and the hills. ____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. O noble king, we have come to seek peace. ____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Hail, Mary! _______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. The enemy raised up a shout on all sides to terrify us. _____________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

8. Hail, Caesar! To you do we all give thanks, for you have spared our lives. ____________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Soldiers, we are held in on all sides by the enemy, who is eager for victory and glory.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. General, I shall inform you where the enemy has pitched camp in order that you may

attack it. __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 269: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

2. Present Imperative Active (pg 296 – 300)

The imperative mood is used in giving commands.

Praise God! Laudā Deum!

(Singular; addressed to ONE person.)

Fight bravely! Pugnāte fortiter!

(Plural: addressed to MORE THAN ONE.)

ASSIGNMENT: Study Grammar Nos. 208, 216 – 218. Note that the imperative is formed on the PRESENT STEM, that it has a SINGULAR and a PLURAL form.

No. 208Active Mood, Imperative Mood (Present Stem) Singular laud-ā (you) praise! Plural laud-āte (you) praise!

No. 216Active Voice Imperative Mood (Present Stem)Singular - mon-ē (you) advise!Plural – mon-ēte (you) advise!

No. 217Active Voice Imperative Mood (Present Stem)Singular - mitt-e (you) send!Plural – mitt-ite (you) send!

No. 218Active Voice Imperative Mood (Present Stem)Singular - aud-ī (you) hear!Plural – aud-īte (you) hear!

Rule of position: The imperative more frequently stands first in the sentence.

Page 270: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Vocabulary (pg 296)

regō, regere, rēxī, rēctus, 3. tr. – direct, rule

at, conj. - but

mēns, mentis - mind

dolor, dolōris – pain, sorrow

miserere nōbis – have mercy on us

adōrō, 1. tr. – adore

Related English Words:

Congress regulates interstate commerce. A regent was appointed to govern for the boy king. Education produces mental habits. Dolorous.

Related Latin Words: Miser; ōrō; rēx

Page 271: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Exercises 308 – 311, Moments at Mass No 2, Reading No 21 (pg 297 – 300) – Assigned in Ch B - # 308-310

Exercise 308 (pg 297)

Translate:

1. Praise God, Christians!

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Help me!

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Hold the hill, soldiers!

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Slaves, prepare grain.

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Hand over your arms.

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Terrify the soldiers.

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Wage war, O king.

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Take away our sins.

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Storm the town.

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Fear God.

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Seek help.

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Carry the sword, slave.

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 272: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Exercise 308 cont

13. Hear the leader.

_________________________________________________________________________

14. Dismiss the chiefs.

__________________________________________________________________________

15. Call upon God.

__________________________________________________________________________

16. Wait for help.

__________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 309 (pg 297)

Translate

1. Rege, Domine, mentēs nostrās ut in Caelum contendāmus. ________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Tolle, Domine, peccāta nostra, tolle dolōrēs nostrōs! ______________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Instrue, lēgāte, mīlitēs prō portā at equitēs mitte in silvās. __________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Deus, quī omnem mundum regis, rege etiam mentem et corpus meum. _______________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Jēsū, quī dolōrēs gravēs prō nōbīs sustinuistī, miserēre nōbīs! ______________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Adjuvā nōs, Domine, nē hostis nōs superet. ____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Dēfendite, lēgātī, agrōs nostrōs! ______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Ostende nōbīs, serve, ubi hostēs sint. _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Sāncta Marīa, ōrā prō nōbīs. ________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

Page 273: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

10. Adōrāte, Chrístiānī, Deum vestrum. __________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Docē mē, Domine, viās tuās ut grātiam tuam semper habeam. _____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Timēte Deum, Rēgem Caelī et terrae, Chrīstiānī! _______________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Vocā, lēgāte, mílitēs ad arma. ______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. Collocā in prímā aciē legiōnēs integrās quae equitēs pellant. ______________________

__________________________________________________________________________

15. Portā, serve, frūmentum in castra nē inopia sit. _________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. Incendite oppida, oppugnāte urbēs, pellite equitēs, occīdite mīlitēs, at vitās prīncipum

cōnservāte! ________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

17. Grātiās, frātrēs meī, Deō agite! ______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

18. Chrīstus autem nōbís, “Habēte,” inquit, “pācem inter vōs.” _________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

19. “Timēte Dominum, omnēs sānctī ējus.” _______________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

20. Chrīstus, “Date,” inquit, “et dabitur vōbīs.” ______________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

21. Manē nōbīscum, Domine. __________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 274: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Exercise 310 (pg 298)

Translate:

1. Find out, lieutenant, what the plan of the enemy is. ________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Soldiers, wait for the arrival of Caesar lest the enemy conquer us. ___________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Keep in memory the courage of our fathers. _____________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Arrive, cavalry, at the bridge at dawn.__________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Lieutenant, lead away the legion. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Approach the enemy swiftly. _________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Soldiers, lay waste the fields of the barbarians. Burn their crops. Attack their towns.

Kill their hostages. Seize their towns, hills, bridges! _________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Call Caesar king and general. _______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Address the centurions by name. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Be well. ________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 275: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W12

Exercise 310 cont

11. Slave, show us where the enemy has stationed guards. __________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Centurion, lead the soldiers across the river and into the forest. ____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Ask the envoy why he has come. ____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. Fight bravely for your king! _________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

15. Inform us how large the army of the enemy is. __________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

16. Raise up a shout and storm the city. __________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

17. Guide, O Lord, my mind and my life. __________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

18. Jesus Christ, have mercy on us. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

19. Adore Jesus Christ, the Son of God. __________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 12

Page 276: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 13

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

13 Lesson 27 – 28

pg 300 - 313

511, 518, 186, 194-196, 352, 127

#312-316, #318-319, #321-322,

Reading No. 23

306

309

3. The Subjunctive in wishes and exhortations (pg 300 – 304)

1. Wishes – In wishes the present subjunctive in main clauses is to be translated by a verb with the auxiliary verb may. Utinam (if only) is often used as the sign of wishes in Latin; it need not be translated. The negative is nē. Notice that the compound verb (e.g. may . . . give) can be separated in English.

Deus det nōbīs pācem. May God give us peace. Utinam veniat. May he come.Nē veniat. May he not come. Adjuvet nōs Deus. May God help us.

2. Exhortations. In English we urge others to do something with us by using the auxiliary verb let, as “Let us give thanks.” Latin uses the first person plural of the present subjunctive, called the HORATORY SUBJUNCTIVE, for exhortations. In translating such verbs, use the English form let us.

Veniāmus. Let us come. Grātiās agāmus. Let us give thanks. Fortiter pugnēmus. Let us fight bravely.

ASSIGNMENT: Learn the rules, Grammar Nos. 511, 518. Review the present subjunctive of all four conjugations and of sum, Grammar Nos 186, 194-196, 352.

No. 511Wishes

3. POSSIBLE wishes are expressed by the PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE with UTINAM. (With the third person utinam is often omitted.) Negative: nē.

(Utinam) nostrī vincant! - May our men conquer! (The battle is still going on; neither side has conquered as yet; it is still POSSIBLE for this wish to come true. Note that the English translation requires the auxilary verb “may”. Utinam is not translated. ) Nē veniant. May they not come.

Page 277: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

No. 518HORTATORY SUBJUNCTIVEAn exhortation in the first person plural is expressed by the PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. Negative: nē. Pugnēmus. Let us fight. Nē cēdāmus. Let us not yield. (Note that tht English uses the verb “let” and puts the person in the accusative; the Latin makes the person the subject of the main verb. )

No. 186Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1, laud-em (that) I may praise may I praise

Singular 2. laud-ēs (that) you may praise may you praise

Singular 3. laud-et (that) he, she, it may praise may he, she, it praise

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. laud-ēmus (that) we may praise may we praise

Plural 2. laud-ētis (that) you may praise may you praise

Plural 3. laud-ent (that) they may praise may they praise

No. 194Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1, mon-eam (that) I may advise may I advise

Singular 2. mon-eās (that) you may advise may you advise

Singular 3. mon-eat (that) he, she, it may advise may he, she, it advise

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. mon-eāmus (that) we may advise may we advise

Plural 2. mon-eātis (that) you may advise may you advise

Plural 3. mon-eant (that) they may advise may they advise

Page 278: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

No. 195Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1, mitt-am (that) I may send may I send

Singular 2. mitt-ās (that) you may send may you send

Singular 3. mitt-at (that) he, she, it may send may he, she, it send

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. mitt-āmus (that) we may send may we send

Plural 2. mitt-ātis (that) you may send may you send

Plural 3. mitt-ant (that) they may send may they send

No. 196Active Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1, aud-iam (that) I may hear may I hear

Singular 2. aud-iās (that) you may hear may you hear

Singular 3. aud-iat (that) he, she, it may hear may he, she, it hear

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. aud-iāmus (that) we may hear may we hear

Plural 2. aud-iātis (that) you may hear may you hear

Plural 3. aud-iant (that) they may hear may they hear

No. 352 Irregular Verbs – sum, esse, fuī , fut ū rus, intr. am, be Subjunctive Present Singular 1, sim I may be

Singular 2. sīs You may be

Singular 3. sit He, she, it may be

Plural 1. sīmus We may be

Plural 2. sītis You may be

Plural 3. sint they may be

Page 279: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercises 312 – 316, Reading No 22 (pg 301 – 304) – Assigned in Ch B - #312 – 316

Exercise 312 (pg 301)

Translate

1. Utinam veniat. _______________________________________________

2. Pugnēmus. __________________________________________________

3. Comparēmus arma. ___________________________________________

4. Dēfendāmus puerōs nostrōs. ____________________________________

5. Nē vincat. ___________________________________________________

6. Expugnet urbem. ______________________________________________

7. Teneant collem. ______________________________________________

8. Conveniāmus. ______________________________________________

9. Incendāmus frūmenta. __________________________________________

10. Vincant! ____________________________________________________

11. Nē cēdāmus. _________________________________________________

12. Nē eōs occīdat! _______________________________________________

13. Mittāmus auxilium. ____________________________________________

14. Nē exspectet. _________________________________________________

Page 280: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 313 (pg 301)

Translate

1. May he fight bravely! _______________________________________________________

2. May they conquer the barbarians! ____________________________________________

3. May God give us a reward! _________________________________________________

4. Let us call the soldiers. ____________________________________________________

5. Let us pray. ______________________________________________________________

6. May they fear God! ________________________________________________________

7. May they not hold the bridge! ________________________________________________

8. Let us hasten and see the king. ___________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Let us withstand the forces of the enemy. ______________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. May God defend us! ____________________________________________________

11. May Thy kingdom come! ___________________________________________________

12. May God lead us into the kingdom of heaven! __________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Let us not yield. _________________________________________________________

14. Let us send them help. ___________________________________________________

15. May Caesar conquer! ____________________________________________________

16. May they rout the barbarians! ______________________________________________

17. Let us hear the speech of the chief. __________________________________________

18. May he be brave! ________________________________________________________

19. May Christ remain with us. ________________________________________________

20. May God help us! _______________________________________________________

21. May God strengthen us! ___________________________________________________

Page 281: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 313 cont

22. May God preserve us! ____________________________________________________

23. Let us not wait for his coming. ______________________________________________

24. Let us remember his courage. _______________________________________________

25. May he arrive safe! _______________________________________________________

26. May they be well! ________________________________________________________

27. May you be well! ________________________________________________________

Page 282: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 314 (pg 301)

Translate

1. “Domine, exaudī1 ōrātiōnem meam, et clāmor meus ad tē veniat.” (From the Mass)

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

2. “Deus autem pācis sit cum omnibus vōbīs. Amen.” (St. Paul)

_________________________________________________________________________

3. “Orēmus.” (From the Mass)

__________________________________________________________________________

4. “Divīnum2 auxilium maneat semper nōbīscum.” (From the Roman Breviary)

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Rēgem martyrum3 Dominum, venīte, adōrēmus. (From the Roman Breviary)

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Sānctus Paulus: “Ipse4 autem,” inquit, “Dominus pācis det vōbīs pācem sempiternam5 in

omnī locō. Dominus sit cum omnibus vōbīs.”

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

_____________________________________

1.exaudio, 4, tr: hear

2.divinus, a, um: divine

3.martyr, martyris: martyr

4.Ipse . . .Dominus: the Lord Himself.

5.sempiternus, a, um: everlasting.

Page 283: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 315 (pg 302)

Identify these forms:

1. veniam __________________________________________________________________

2. vincet ___________________________________________________________________

3. laudet ___________________________________________________________________

4. portent __________________________________________________________________

5. regat ____________________________________________________________________

6. convenient _______________________________________________________________

Exercise 316 (pg 302)

Translate and Explain the italicized form.

1. Veniat celeriter. __________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Vincat Chrstus Rēx! _______________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Valeāmus. _______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Valeās. _________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Veniāmus. ______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Venīte, adōrēmus. ________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Videāmus puerum. ________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 284: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 316 cont

8. Valēte. __________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Nē pugnēmus. ___________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Adjuvēmus omnēs hominēs. _______________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Petāmus grātiam Deī. _____________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Vocāte mīlitēs ad arma. ____________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

13. Regat Chrīstus mentēs nostrās. _____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

14. Bonus sīs. ______________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 285: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Lesson 28: SUUS and SUI (pg 305 – 313)

1.SUUS and SUI as DIRECT REFLEXIVES (pg 305 – 309)We have seen that suī (sibi, sē, sē) is used for himself (him), herself (her), itself (it), themselves (them), when these words refer TO THE SUBJECT OF THEIR OWN CLAUSE. When so used, sui is called a DIRECT REFLEXIVE.

Sē laudat. He praises himself.

ASSIGNMENT: Review the declension and meanings of sui, Grammar No. 127. See also the previous lesson on reflexives, page 135.

No. 127

Personal Pronouns of the Third Person

a. Reflexive

Nom …....... ….....

Gen. suī of himself, herself, itself, themselves

Dat. sibi to himself, herself, itself, themselves

Acc. sē (sēsē) himself, herself, itself, themselves

Abl. sē (sēsē) (by, etc.) himself, herself, itself, themselves

Note: Ablative - Sēcum is used for cum sē.

Suua, a, um is the POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVE corresponding to suī. It is used to mean his (his own), her (her own), its (its own), their (their own). ACCORDING TO THE WORD TO WHICH IT REFERS. Since suus, a, um is an adjective, it agrees in gender, number, and case with the word which it MODIFIES. Like suī, suus, a, um is used to REFER TO THE SUBJECT OF ITS OWN CLAUSE (DIRECT REFLEXIVE).

Caesar suōs mīlitēs laudāvit. Caesar praised his (own) soldiers.

Māter fīlium suum laudat. A mother praises her (own) son.

Legiō signum suum dēfendit. The legion defends its (own) standard.

Mīlitēs imperātōrem suum laudant. The soldiers praise their (own) general.

Page 286: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

When his, her, its, etc. do not refer to the subject of their own clause, ējus and eorum (the possessive genitives of is, ea, id) are to be used. (EXCEPT IN SOME CASES TO BE SEEN IN THE NEXT SECTION)

Centuriō fortiter pugnāvit. Itaque Caesar virtūtem ējus laudāvit. The centurion fought bravely. And so Caesar praised his courage.

Caesar Gallōs vīcit atque ēorum ducēs occīdit. Caesar conquered the Gauls and killed their leaders.

Note: Just as forms of ego, nōs, tū, vōs are used as reflexives of the first and second person, so forms of meus, noster, tuus, vester are used as reflexives of the first and second persons. Suī and suus are used for the THIRD PERSON ONLY.

We defend our own lives. Vītās nostrās dēfendimus.

Vocabulary (pg 306)suus, a, um - his (own), her (own), its (own), their (own)

fuga, ae – flight

dēdō, dēdere, dēdidī, dēditus, 3, tr. - give up, surrender

rēs publica, reī publicae – state, republic

dīligō, dīligere, dīlēxi, dīlēctus, 3. tr – love

Note: Where we say simply surrender in English, dēdō must always be used an ACCUSATIVE REFLEXIVE PRONOUN.

The Gauls surrendered to the Romans. Gallī Romanīs sē dēdiderunt. We surrendered to the Gauls. Gallīs nōs dēdidimus. (Nōs is accusative.)

Of course, dēdō have have other objects.

We surrendered the arms to the enemy. Arma hostibus dēdidimus.

Related English Words: A fugitive from justice. We shall always defend our republic.

Related Latin Words: Dō

Page 287: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercises 317 – 320, Reading No. 23 (pg 307 – 309) – Assigned in Ch B - #318-319, Reading # 23

Exercise 318 (pg 307)

1. Translate

2. Explain the use of the italicized words.

1. Agrōs atque urbēs suās dēfendēbant. _________________________________________ __________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Fortiter sē dēfendunt. ______________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Post Caesaris victōriam atque suōrum prīncipum caedem, hostēs sē suaque omnia eī

dēdidērunt. ________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Barbarī post equitum suōrum caedem fugā salūtem petīvērunt. _____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Nōnne mātrēs fīliōs suōs dīligunt? ____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Barbarī fugā montēs petīvērunt, at magnus eōrum numerus in fugā ab equitibus Rōmānīs

occīsus est. ________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 288: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 318 cont

7. Gallī lēgātōs ad Caesarem mīsērunt quī auxilium peterent. Itaque Caesar ad eōs mīsit

equitēs quī fīnēs eōrum dēfenderent.____________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

8. Dīligite, frātrēs meī, Deum. Deus enim pācem suam vōbīs dabit. ____________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

9. Laudāvitne Caesar virtūtem suōrum? _________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

10. Etiam hostēs saepe fortiter pugnāvērunt. Itaque Caesar virtūtem eōrum laudāvit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

11. Gallī saepe equitēs ad Caesarem mīsērunt quī cum cōpiīs ējus pugnārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

12. Lēgātus nuntium dē perīculō suō ad Caesarem mīsit. Itaque Caesar statim omnēs cōpiās

suās in fīnēs barbarōrum clam et celeriter dēdūxit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 289: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 319 (pg 307)

Translate:

1. Did the Romans often rout the barbarians and kill a great number of them?

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. The tribes of Gaul were exchanging hostages in order to strengthen peace and friendship

among themselves. _______________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

3. Caesar stationed guards at the bridge in order that he might more easily defend his (men).

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

4. The lieutenant asked the slaves where their master was. _________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. They fought long and bitterly because they were fighting for their lives. _______________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. They fortified the camp with a ditch and a rampart in order to defend themselves more

easily. _________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

7. Caesar was a great general. The Romans always kept his victories and courage in

memory. _________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

8. The general called the centurions and the military tribunes to him. __________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

9. We will defend our own cities and our own fields. _______________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 290: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

READING NO. 23 (pg 308-309)

A Roman Lieutenant Addresses his MenQuantō in perīculō, mīlitēs, sīmus, vōs omnēs cognōvistis. In castrīs enim nostrīs est inopia

frūmentī et omnium rērum. Undique autem ā barbarīs continēmur.

_________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Quantus sit numerus hostium, vōs doceō; quanta autem sit eōrum virtūs, vōs vidētis. Nam hostēs

populī Rōmānī usque ad castra Rōmāna appropinquant.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Cupidī victōriae et bellī glōriae neque equitēs neque legiōnēs nostrās timent. Litterās ad Caesarem

mīsimus, at servus cui litterās dedimus ab hostibus vīsus est atque occīsus.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Itaque neque auxilium exspectāmus neque sociōs habēmus.

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 291: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Reading No. 23 cont.

Itaque quid, mīlitēs Rōmānī, agēmus? Num pācem petēmus? Num ad hostēs legātōs mittēmus quī dē

salūte nostrā agant?

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Num nōs nostrque omnia hostibus populī Rōmānī tradēmus?

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Pōnite, mīlitēs, spem in virtūte! Virūtem patrum nostrōrum memoriā tenēte! Mūnite castra!

Impetūs hostium sustinēte!

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Cōpiās hostium pellite, vincite, occīdite! Pugnāte usque ad mortem! Imperātor Rōmānus propter

glōriam nōminis Rōmānī vōs ad arma et mortem vocat!

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 292: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

2. SUUS and SUI as INDIRECT REFLEXIVES (pg 309 – 313)When a personal pronoun of the THIRD person is in a SUBORDINATE PURPOSE clause or INDIRECT QUESTION and REFERS to the SUBJECT of the MAIN verb, suī and suus (not is, ea, id or ējus, eorum) should be used. In this use suī and suus are called INDIRECT reflexives.

Caesar milites vocavit qui sē dēfenderent. Caesar called the soldiers to defend him.

Caesar equitēs misit qui lēgatos suos dēfenderent. Caesar sent the cavalry to defend his envoys.

Vocabulary (pg 309)

ante, prep. w. acc. – before

praesidium, ī – garrison, protection

vērō, postpositive – in truth, but

(Vērō is a postpositive, i.e. it never stands first in a clause)

Related English Words: Verily. Caesar’s war antedate the birth of Christ.

Idiom Study1. Dō with in fugam means put to flight. Caesar hostēs in fugam dedit. Caesar put the enemy to flight. 2. With proper names the ablative nōmine, by name, is frequently used. Translate named.Servus, nomine Titus, in hībernīs erat. A slave named (by name) Titus was in the winter quarters.

S2W13

Page 293: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Exercises 321 – 323 (pg 310 – 312) – Assigned in Ch B - #321- 322

Exercise 321 (pg 310)

Translate

Explain the use of the italicized pronouns

Diagram No. 1 (first sentence)

1. Centuriō servum, nōmine Titum, ad Caesarem mīsit quī eum docēret quantō in perīculō

praesidia essent. Itaque Caesar statim exercitum suum dēdūxit atque equitēs mīsit quī eum

dē adventū suō docērent. ____________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. Gallī, verō, oppida sua _________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

3. Lēgātus eum per nuntiōs ante proelium docuit quantō in perīculō esset legiō sua.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

4. Rōmānī viās mūnīvērunt quō facilius cōpiās suās in prōvinciās dēdūcerent.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. Caesar novās legiōnēs in Galliam mīsit nē barbarī suōs superārent.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

6. Barbarī Rōmānōs proeliō pepulērunt nē eī per fīnēs suōs exercitum dūcerent.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 294: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W13

Exercise 321 cont

7. Gallī praemia Caesarī mīsērunt ut grātiam apud eum habērent.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

8. Caesar, vērō, mīlitēs suōs flūmen trādūxit ut reliqua oppida expugnāret atque incenderet.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Exercise 322 (pg 310)

Translate and Explain the translation of the italicized words:

1. The American people heard in how great danger their soldiers were in Bataan.1

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

1 Bataan: Bataan, indeclineable noun

1b. But they did not send arms and reinforcements because Bataan was far distant from their territory.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. Caesar sent reinforcements into the first battle line in order that they might help his legions

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

3. They routed the barbarians lest they should burn their crops.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

4. He showed them what his plans were.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

5. Did Caesar give rewards to the slaves who were in his camp?

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 13

Page 295: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 14

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

14 Lesson 29

pp 314 - 322

267-274, 546-547, 275-282, 660-662, 781

#324-327, 329 - 331

#334

314

317

Lesson 29: The Passive Subjunctive (pg 314 – 324)

1. Present and Imperfect subjunctive passive (pg 314 – 317)

Assignment: Learn Grammar Nos. 267 – 274. Note that the passive subjunctive is formed by changing the final personal signs exactly as was done in the indicative. No. 267

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1. laud-er (that) I may be praised may I be praised

Singular 2. laud-ēris (that) you may be praised may you be praised

Singular 3. laud-ētur (that) he, she, it may be praised may he, she, it be praised

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. laud-ēmur (that) we may be praised may we be praised

Plural 2. laud-ēminī (that) you may be praised may you be praised

Plural 3. laud-entur (that) they may be praised may they be praised

Page 296: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No. 268

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses

Singular 1. laud-ārer (that) I might be praised

Singular 2. laud-ārēris (that) you might be praised

Singular 3. laud-ārētur (that) he, she, it might be praised

In Purpose Clauses

Plural 1. laud-ārēmur (that) we might be praised

Plural 2. laud-ārēminī (that) you might be praised

Plural 3. laud-ārēntur (that) they might be praised

No. 269

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1. mon-ear (that) I may be may I be

Singular 2. mon-eāris (that) you may be may you be

Singular 3. mon-eātur (that) he, she, it may be may he, she, it be

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. mon-eāmur (that) we may be may we be

Plural 2. mon-eāminī (that) you may be may you be

Plural 3. mon-eantur (that) they may be may they be

Page 297: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No. 270

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1. mitt-ar (that) I may be sent may I be sent

Singular 2. mitt-āris (that) you may be sent may you be sent

Singular 3. mitt-ātur (that) he, she, it may be sent may he, she, it be sent

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. mitt-āmur (that) we may be sent may we be sent

Plural 2. mitt-āminī (that) you may be sent may you be sent

Plural 3. mitt-antur (that) they may be sent may they be sent

No. 271

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Present Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Singular 1. aud-iar (that) I may be heard may I be heard

Singular 2. aud-iāris (that) you may be heard may you be heard

Singular 3. aud-iātur (that) he, she, it may be heard may he, she, it be heard

In Purpose Clauses In Wishes

Plural 1. aud-iāmur (that) we may be heard may we be heard

Plural 2. aud-iāminī (that) you may be heard may you be heard

Plural 3. aud-iantur (that) they may be heard may they be heard

Page 298: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No. 272

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses

Singular 1. mon-ērer (that) I might be advised

Singular 2. mon-ērēris (that) you might be advised

Singular 3. mon-ērētur (that) he, she, it might be

In Purpose Clauses

Plural 1. mon-ērēmur (that) we might be advised

Plural 2. mon-erēminī (that) you might be advised

Plural 3. mon-ērēntur (that) they might be advised

No. 273

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses

Singular 1. mitt-erer (that) I might be sent

Singular 2. mitt-erēris (that) you might be sent

Singular 3. mitt-erētur (that) he, she, it might be sent

In Purpose Clauses

Plural 1. mitt-erēmur (that) we might be sent

Plural 2. mitt-erēminī (that) you might be sent

Plural 3. mitt-erēntur (that) they might be sent

Page 299: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No. 274

Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Imperfect Tense (Present Stem)

In Purpose Clauses

Singular 1. aud-īrer (that) I might be heard

Singular 2. aud-īrēris (that) you might be heard

Singular 3. aud-īrētur (that) he, she, it might be heard

In Purpose Clauses

Plural 1. aud-īrēmur (that) we might be heard

Plural 2. aud-īrēminī (that) you might be heard

Plural 3. aud-īrēntur (that) they might be heard

Review the rules for purpose clauses, Grammar, Nos. 546 – 547

No. 546Adverbial Clauses: Purpose ClausesPurpose clauses are introduced by:

2. ut (negative: nē)3. quī, quae, quod 4. quō (negative: nē) before a comparative;

Mood: subjunctive; Tense: after a primary tense, use the present; after a secondary tense, use the imperfect.

Pugnō ut vincam I fight - to conquer

1. in order that I may conquer.2. that I may conquer 3. in order to conquer 4. for the purpose of conquering. 5. for the sake of conquering.

Pugnāvī ut vincerem. I fight - to conquer

6. in order that I might conquer.7. that I might conquer 8. in order to conquer 9. for the purpose of conquering. 10. for the sake of conquering.

Pugno ne vincar. I fight lest I be conquered. I fight that I may not be conquered.

Page 300: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No 547 Note: 1. Quō (negative: nē) is used when the purpose clause contains a comparative adverb or adjective. Urbem mūnīvit quō facilius eam dēfenderet. He fortified the city that he might more easily defend it.

Mīlitēs in castra vocāvit nē diūtius pugnārent. He called the soldiers into the camp lest they fight longer.

Vocabulary (pg 314) parvus, a, um – small, little

mōs, mōris, m. – custom, habit

manus, ūs, f. - a band of men, hand

causa, ae – cause

causā, preceded by gen. - for the sake of

Note: 1. The ablative of causa is used as a preposition. It governs the GENITIVE and always stands AFTER the word it governs.

aquae causā - for the sake of water pācis causā – for the sake of peace

2. The ablative of mōs (mōre) may be translated according to custom.

Related English Words: Manual labor; manufactured goods.

Sāncta Maria, Māter Dei, orā prō nōbis!

Page 301: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 324 – 328 (pg 315 – 317) – Assigned in Ch B - # 324 – 327

Exercise 324 (pg 315)

Translate; Explain the tenses in the subordinate clauses:

1. They came into the forest lest they be routed (seen; overcome; conquered; terrified; held; put to flight; heard).

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. He sent a small band to fortifiy (seize; hold; defend; burn; assault; storm) the winter

quarters.

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

3. He is warning the soldiers lest they be overcome (conquered; routed; put to flight; terrrified; seen; held; killed).

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

4. He is sending the cavalry that the town may be more easily seized (burned; fortified;

defended; assaulted; stormed; held).

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

Page 302: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 325 (pg 315)

Translate; Parse the italicized words:

1. Caesar suōs nōmine appellābat atque signum legionis manū tenēbat nē suī ab hostibus

in fugam darentur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Caesar aquae causā ad flūmen castra posuit quō facilius atque diūtius impetus hostium

ā suīs sustinēretur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Imperātor legiōnēs clam in fīnēs hostium dēdūxit nē ab hostibus vidērentur. Statim

impetum in Gallōs fēcērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Tum vērō prīncipēs Gallōrum bellī causā manūs cōgēbant, arma parābant, virūtem suōrum

ōrātiōnibus mōre suō cōnfirmābant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Caesar cum parvā manū trāns montēs contendit nē ā mīlitibus suīs in eōrum perīculo abesset.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 303: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 325 cont

5. Gallī post proelium sē suaque omnia Caesarī dēdidērunt ut vītae obsidum suōrum ā

Caesare cōnservārentur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Nōnne nōs Americānī ante bellum exercitum cōgimus atque arma tēlaque parāmus nē

ab hostibus vincāmur?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. Portae incēnsae sunt, atque equitēs celeriter in oppidum missī sunt ut oppidum statim

occupārētur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Tum barbarī more suō clāmōrem sustulērunt atque sē suaque omnia Rōmānīs

salūtis causā dēdidērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Caesar vērō vītās eōrum nōn cōnservāvit nē lēgātī suī ā barbarīs occīderentur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Nam injūria atque caedēs lēgātōrum fuerant bellī causa.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 304: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14 Exercise 326 (pg 316)

Translate

1. May God be praised!

__________________________________________________________________________

2. May the enemy be conquered!

__________________________________________________________________________

3. May the town be burned!

__________________________________________________________________________

4. May the leader be warned!

__________________________________________________________________________

5. May we be spared!

__________________________________________________________________________

6. May guards be stationed!

__________________________________________________________________________

7. May they be helped by God!

__________________________________________________________________________

8. May the state be preserved!

__________________________________________________________________________

9. May my life be ruled by God!

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 305: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 326 cont

10. May God be loved by all men!

__________________________________________________________________________

11. May they be put to flight!

__________________________________________________________________________

12. May our sins be taken away!

__________________________________________________________________________

13. May we be taught by God!

__________________________________________________________________________

14. May help be sent to us!

__________________________________________________________________________

15. May he be always kept in memory!

__________________________________________________________________________

16. May Mary be praised by all men!

__________________________________________________________________________

17. May the grace of God be given to you all!

__________________________________________________________________________

18. May rewards be given to brave men!

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 306: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14 Exercise 327 (pg 316)

Translate

1. The barbarians, according to their custom, raised a shout lest they be killed by the

lieutenant.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

2. Christ came into the world that our sins might be taken away.

________________________________________________________________________________

3. Let the state be preserved for the sake of our peace and our common welfare.

________________________________________________________________________________

4. The Gauls burned their towns (with their own hands) lest they be seized by the Romans.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

5. God will give grace to those who sustain great sorrows for the sake of peace.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

6. Brave and free men will always fight that our state may be preserved.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 307: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 327 cont

7. They pitched camp at the river for the sake of water.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

8. He waited for reinforcements lest he be hard pressed by the enemy.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

9. He stationed a small band of men there lest the hill be seized by the barbarians.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

10. Caesar informs us about the customs both of the Gauls and of his own soldiers.

________________________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________________________

Page 308: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

2. The Perfect System of the passive subjunctive (pg 317 – 319)The perfect tenses of the passive subjunctive OF ALL LATIN VERBS, REGULAR AND IRREGULAR, are formed in the same way. They are COMPOUND tenses just as in the indicative. To form these tenses: 1. Find the perfect participle passive. 2. Add, as a separate word, the proper form of the verb sum

ASSIGNMENT: Study Grammar Nos. 275 – 282. Review in direct questions, Grammar Nos 660 – 662 and First Year Latin, pages 281 and 286.

No 275Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with sim, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 laudātus, a, um sim (whether) I was praised (I have been praised)

Sing 2 laudātus, a, um sīs (whether) you were praised (you have been praised)

Sing. 3 laudātus, a, um sit (whether) he, she, it was praised (he, she, it has been praised)

Pl. 1 laudātī, ae, a sīmus (whether) we were praised (we have been praised

Pl. 2 laudātī, ae, a sītis (whether) you were praised (you have been praised)

Pl. . 3 laudātī, ae, a sint (whether) they were praised (they have been praised)

No 276Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with essem, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 laudātus, a, um essem (whether) I had been praised

Sing 2 laudātus, a, um essēm (whether) you had been praised

Sing. 3 laudātus, a, um esset (whether) he, she, it had been praised

Pl. 1 laudātī, ae, a essēmus (whether) we had been praised

Pl. 2 laudātī, ae, a essētis (whether) you had been praised

Pl. . 3 laudātī, ae, a essent (whether) they had been praised

Page 309: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No 277Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with sim, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 monitus, a, um sim (whether) I was advised (I have been advised)

Sing 2 monitus, a, um sīs (whether) you were advised (you have been advised)

Sing. 3 monitus, a, um sit (whether) he, she, it was advised (he, she, it has been advised)

Pl. 1 monītī, ae, a sīmus (whether) we were advised (we have been advised)

Pl. 2 monītī, ae, a sītis (whether) you were advised (you have been advised)

Pl. . 3 monītī, ae, a sint (whether) they were advised (they have been advised)

No 278Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with sim, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 missus, a, um sim (whether) I was sent (I have been sent )

Sing 2 missus, a, um sīs (whether) you were sent (you have been sent)

Sing. 3 missus, a, um sit (whether) he, she, it was sent (he, she, it has been sent)

Pl. 1 missī, ae, a sīmus (whether) we were sent (we have been sent)

Pl. 2 missī, ae, a sītis (whether) you were sent (you have been sent )

Pl. . 3 missī, ae, a sint (whether) they were sent (they have been sent)

Page 310: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No 279Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Perfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with sim, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 audītus, a, um sim (whether) I was heard (I have been heard)

Sing 2 audītus, a, um sīs (whether) you were heard (you have been heard)

Sing. 3 audītus, a, um sit (whether) he, she, it was heard (he, she, it has been heard)

Pl. 1 audītī, ae, a sīmus (whether) we were heard (we have been heard)

Pl. 2 audītī, ae, a sītis (whether) you were heard (you have been heard)

Pl. . 3 audītī, ae, a sint (whether) they were heard (they have been heard)

No 280Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with essem, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 monitus, a, um essem (whether) I had been advised

Sing 2 monitus, a, um essēm (whether) you had been advised

Sing. 3 monitus, a, um esset (whether) he, she, it had been advised

Pl. 1 monitī, ae, a essēmus (whether) we had been advised

Pl. 2 monitī, ae, a essētis (whether) you had been advised

Pl. . 3 monitī, ae, a essent (whether) they had been advised

Page 311: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

No 281Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with essem, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 missus, a, um essem (whether) I had been sent

Sing 2 missus, a, um essēm (whether) you had been sent

Sing. 3 missus, a, um esset (whether) he, she, it had been sent

Pl. 1 missī, ae, a essēmus (whether) we had been sent

Pl. 2 missī, ae, a essētis (whether) you had been sent

Pl. . 3 missī, ae, a essent (whether) they had been sent

No 282Passive Voice, Subjunctive Mood, Pluperfect Tense, (Perfect Participle passive with essem, etc.)In Indirect Questions

Sing 1 audītus, a, um essem (whether) I had been heard

Sing 2 audītus, a, um essēm (whether) you had been heard

Sing. 3 audītus, a, um esset (whether) he, she, it had been heard

Pl. 1 audītī, ae, a essēmus (whether) we had been heard

Pl. 2 audītī, ae, a essētis (whether) you had been heard

Pl. . 3 audītī, ae, a essent (whether) they had been heard

No. 660 Indirect Questions Definition: An INDIRECT question is one that depends on a verb saying, asking, knowing, etc. As a noun clause it may be used as SUBJECT, OBJECT, APPOSITIVE, or PREDICATE NOUN. It is introduced by the same interrogative participles, adverbs, pronouns, and adjectives as direct questions.

No. 661 Note: Nōnne is NEVER used except with QUAERŌ. Num and -ne mean whether (if). Necne is used for annōn, or not, in a double indirect question. Quī (in this form, the nominative masculine singular only) is sometimes used for quis.

Page 312: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Vocabulary (pg 317)sciō, scīre, scīvī, scītus, 4. tr. – knowpācō, 1, tr - pacify subitō, adv. – suddenly probō, 1. tr – approve, prove relinquō, relinquere, relīqui, relictus, 3. tr. - leave, leave behind

Related English Words: Science. He is out on probation. He will not relinquish his rights. The story is not probable.

Related Latin Word: Pāx.

CUM, WHEN, in secondary sequence usually takes the subjunctive. Use the imperfect or pluperfect according to the general ruile, Grammar, Nos, 531 – 533.

Cum equitēs in silvīs pugnārent, Caesar mīlitēs trāns flūmen trādūxit. When the calvary were fighting in the forest, Caesar led the soldiers acros the river.

Caesar cum hostēs vīdisset, legiōnēs pro castrīs īnstrūxit. When Caesar had seen the enemy, he drew up the legions in front of the camp.

In Secondary Sequence: (LISTED IN BOOK BUT NOT ASSIGNED IN CH B)

No. 531 1. When the action of the subordinate verb happens BEFORE the action of the main verb, the PLUPERFECT subjunctive must be used.

Rogāvī quis advēnisset. I asked who had come. (The “coming” happened before the “asking”.)

No. 532 2. When the action of the subordinate verb happens AT THE SAME TIME AS the action of the main verb, the IMPERFECT subjunctive3 must be used in the subordinate clause. Rogāvī quis pugnārent. I asked who was fighting. (The “fighting” happens at the same time as the “asking”.

No. 533 3. When the action of the subordinate verb happens AFTER the action of the main verb, the IMPERFECT subjunctive must be used. Vēnit ut urbem oppugnāret. He came to attack the city. (The “attacking” happens after the “coming”.)

Page 313: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercises 329 – 331 (pg 318 – 319) – Assigned in Ch B – ALL

Exercise 329 (pg 318)

1. Translate.

2. Explain the tenses in the subordinate clauses.

1. He knew why they had been routed (praised; overcome; called; warned; killed; terrified;

seen; held).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. They knew where they had been led (sent; collected; called).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. He knows who was sent (sought; killed; praised; warned; called; overcome; terrified).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. He knew where they were being stationed (left; killed; drawn up).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. He knows whether the fields are being laid waste (seized, defended).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 314: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 329 cont

6. He knows where they are being led (collected; called; moved; sent).

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

7. He knew why he was being praised; (overcome; called; warned; feared; terrified; held; left)

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 315: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 330

Translate

1. Cum omnis Gallia pācāta esset, Caesar praesidia in hībernīs relīquit et in Italiam contendit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2. Centuriō ante proelium rogāvit quae cōnsilia ā Caesare probāta essent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. Num scīs quō lēgātī missī sint?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. Cum agmen per loca difficilia et angusta dūcerētur, subitō vīsa est aciēs barbarōrum.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Scītisne num legio quae in castrīs fuerat ā lēgāto relicta sit?

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. Cum frūmenta ab equitibus incenderentur, mīlitēs castra vallō fossāque mūniēbant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 316: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 330 cont.

7. Cum Chrīstus Jūdaeīs1 ostēnsus ā Pīlātō2 esset, Jūdaeī1 magnum clāmōrem sustulērunt:

“Nōn habēmus rēgem nisi3 Caesarem. Tollite! Crucifīgātur!”4

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

_________________________

1 Judaeus, i: Jew.

2 Pilatus, i: Pilate.

3 nisi: except.

4 crucifigo, 3, tr.: crucify.

Page 317: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14 Exercise 331 (pg 319)

Translate.

When the legions had been left in winter quarters in Gaul and Caesar had hastened into Italy,

the Gauls exchanged hostages and treated about war among themselves.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

When the plans had been approved in a common council, suddenly they attacked the winter quarters.

The Garrisons were in great danger.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Therefore, a messenger was sent to Caesar that help might be sent. Caesar knew how large the

enemy Forces were and where guards had been stationed.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 318: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14 Exercise 331 (cont)

He immediately led his new legions into Gaul lest the winter quarters be taken (by storm). Suddenly,

his column was seen by the enemy.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

They were terrified and at once sent envoys to seek peace. Then they surrendered to him. Thus,

Gaul was pacified.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 319: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

3. The Ablative of Cause (pg 319 – 324)

We have seen that the CAUSE OR REASON may be expressed in Latin in various ways: 1. Propter: They were terrified on account of the arrival of Caesar. Propter adventum Caesaris territī sunt.

2. Quod: They were terrified because Caesar had arrived.

Territī sunt quod Caesar advēnerat.

3. Nam; enim (postpositive)They were terrified, for Caesar had arrived. Territī sunt, nam Caesar advēnerat.

The ablative without a preposition may also be used to express the CAUSE OR REASON (ABLATIVE OF CAUSE).

They were terrified at (because of, on account of, by) the arrival of Caesar. Adventū Caesaris territī sunt.

Assignment: Learn the rule, Grammar No. 781

No. 781

The Ablative of Cause The ablative is sometimes used to express the cause or reason.

Victōriā gaudet. He rejoices in his victory. (because of his victory, on account of his victory)

Spē dēlector. I take delight in hope.

Note: The ablative of cause is frequently merely a special variety of the ablative of means. It is therefore sometimes very difficult to distinguish between these two types of ablatives.

Chrīstē, audī nōs!

Page 320: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14 Exercises 332 - 335, Reading No. 25 (pg 320 – 324) – Assigned in Ch B - # 334

Exercise 334 (pg 321)

Translate:

1. Hail, Jesus Christ, who for the sake of our salvation didst come into the world and

through sorrow and toil didst take away our sins.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Thou hast taught us the truth. Thou hast taught us the way of salvation.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Rule our minds and our lives. Thou has taught us where true peace ís.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Let us love Him and adore Him. Jseús Christ, our Lord, have mercy on us!

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

2 . For the sake of peace Caesar left garrisons in the states which he had pacified.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Then, however, Caesar hastened into Italy.

_________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________

S2W14

Page 321: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Exercise 334 cont.

When this had been learned by the Gauls, new plans were approved by them and

they exchanged hostages that peace and friendship might be strengthened among them.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

But Caesar, when he had learned what plans had been approved by the barbarians,

left Rome and suddenly arrived in the territory of the Gauls with a small band of men.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Meanwhile, the Gauls had retained the envoys whom Caesar had sent to them and

had assaulted the winter quarters.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Caesar immediately hastened into the winter quarters lest they be stormed by the barbarians.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 322: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 334 cont.

He arrived with a small band of men.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

When his column had been seen by the enemy, they made an attack on his men without

delay.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

His men were hard pressed, but Caesar called upon them by name and held the standard of

the legion with his hand lest they be routed.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

The enemy were put to flight. Caesar hastened with all his forces to their camp, but they,

according to their custom, raised a shout and surrendered themselves and (all their

possessions) to him.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Caesar knew what had been the cause of the war.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________\

Page 323: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W14

Exercise 334 cont.

Therefore, he killed the hostages of the Gauls, that his envoys might not afterwards be held

and killed by them.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Thus had he defended the state and, on account of his victory, the Roman Senate without

delay praised him and gave thanks to him.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

3. A lieutenant, by name Labienus, was often praised by Caesar.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

4. May God give us His peace and always defend us!

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

5. Jesus Christ, Son of God, have mercy on us.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

6. They were terrified at the arrival of Caesar.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

END OF WEEK 14

Page 324: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

Challenge B SEMESTER 2 WEEK 15

W Reading Grammar Exercises Vocab

15 Lesson 29

322 - 324

(no reading on these pages)

Review Reading No. 25 Review

Reading No. 25 (pg 322)

DAVID, REX

Davīd, vir nōbilis et fortis, sīcut, scītis, rēx, erat Israēlītārum. Israēlītae autem bellum

cum Philisthīnīs gerēbant nē agrī suī ab eīs occupārentur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Philisthīnī autem Bethlehēm tenēbant. Castra enim ibi posuērant. Davīd cum parvā hominum

manū erat in praesidiō et nōn longē ab eōrum castrīs āfuit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Praesidium ibi collocātum erat ut Davīd et suōs dēfenderet et cognōsceret quae ab hostibus

gererentur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

In castris autem Israēlītārum erat magna aquae inōpia. Propter id magnum dolōrem et

Davīd et mīlitēs sustinēbant.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 325: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W15

Reading No. 25 cont.

In Bethlehēm autem, quod ā Philisthīnīs tenēbātur, erat aquae cōpia. Itaque Davīd, "Sī

habērem," inquit, "aquam dē cisternā quae est in Bethlehēm!"

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Cum vērō ea ā mīlitibus audīta essent, trēs fortēs virī clam ad castra hostium

pervēnērunt ut aquam ad rēgem portārent.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Magnum erat perīculum, tamen ā custōdibus hostium vīsī nōn sunt. Itaque aquam ad rēgem

tūtī portāvērunt et eī dedērunt.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Rēx vērō, cum aquam vīdisset, eōrum virtūte et amīcitiā vehementer mōtus est. Per

loca enim perīculōrum plēna in castra hostium pervēnērunt ut ad eum aqua portārētur.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Page 326: henlelatinhelps.files.wordpress.com · Web viewThe preposition used is ab, by, which is generally written ā before a word beginning with any consonsant except h. Ab (ā) ALWAYS takes

S2W15

Reading No. 25 cont.

Scīvit rēx quantō in perīculō propter sē fuiessent. Itaque eis grātiās ēgit sed aquam in terram

Dominō lībāvit.

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Davīd enim, "The Lord," inquit, "be mericful to me that I amy not do this; shall I drink

the blood of these men that went at the peril of their lives?"

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

END OF Challenge B SEMESTER 2!!


Recommended